manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C255 Series, Service Manual, Page: 321 / 987

Share
Download
Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C255 Series Service Manual Download Page 321

4. Set/register the data again.

Set/register the data again by referring to the list that was printed before replacement.

5. When an encryption key/certificate/CA certificate has been generated or added by the user, ask the user to execute

regeneration.

6. Execute auto gradation adjustment.

• For Reader/ ADF model

Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust

• For Printer model

Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Quick Adjust

 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass

■ Aftter Replacing

1. Enter the value (XXXXYYYYZZZZ) shown on the Barcode Label affixed at the upper right of the Copyboard.

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Z

CAUTION:

Be sure to make the white plate data adjustment before ADF white level adjustment.

W-PLT-X

W-PLT-Y

W-PLT-Z

2. Scanner Unit white level adjustment

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC

3. ADF white level adjustment

1. Place an A4 or LTR size paper on the Copyboard Glass and execute the service mode.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1

2. Place an A4 or LTR size paper on the ADF and execute the service mode.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

4. Write the values on the service label for the Reader (back side of the Front door).

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Y
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-Z

 After Replacing the Scanner Unit (Front)

■ Works After Replacement

1. Execute the following service mode to perform automatic adjustment of the reader shading position.

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RDSHDPOS

2. Execute the following service mode to perform the black and white reference level adjustment for the Scanner Unit.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CL-AGC

3. Execute the following service mode to perform automatic adjustment of the reading position during DADF reading.

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS

4. Follow the steps shown below to adjust the ADF white level.

1. Place an A4 or LTR size paper on the Copyboard Glass and execute the following service mode.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1

5. Adjustment

310

Summary of Contents for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C255 Series

Page 1: ...Revision 2 0 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C355 C255 Series Service Manual ...

Page 2: ...g or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copyright This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved Under the copyright laws this manual ma...

Page 3: ... door and closing the delivery unit door which results in supplying the machine with power 2 In the digital circuits 1 is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is High while 0 is used to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically all cases the internal me...

Page 4: ...figuration 7 Model Type 7 Option 8 Pickup Delivery Image Reading System Options 8 Function expansion system options 9 Features 11 Improved Operability of Replacing Major Parts 11 Specifications 14 Specifications 14 Weight and Size 15 Productivity 16 Paper Type 16 Parts Name 18 Cross Section View 18 Control Panel 19 2 Technology 20 Functional Configuration 21 Original Exposure System 22 Features 22...

Page 5: ...ilization Control 65 Toner Supply Assembly 67 Waste Toner Feeding Area 74 Other Controls 76 Fixing System 79 Overview 79 Specifications 79 Component Parts 79 Fixing temperature control 81 Standby Temperature Control 82 Print Temperature Control 83 Down Sequence Control 84 Fixing Film Unit Engagement Disengagement Control 86 Pre fixing Arch Level Control 87 Arch Sensor Control 88 Protection Functio...

Page 6: ...ng the Delivery Tray 156 Removing the Rear Upper Cover 157 Removing the Upper Cover 159 Removing the Control Panel Unit 161 Original Exposure Feed System 167 Removing the ADF Unit 167 Removing the ADF Pickup Unit 173 Removing the ADF Separation Unit 174 Removing the Scanner Unit Back 175 Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit 182 Removing the Scanner Unit Front 183 Removing the Reader Motor 187 Control...

Page 7: ...he Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Multi purpose Tray Feed Roller 267 Removing the Registration Pickup Unit 279 Procedure after replacement When images with uneven density white spots are generated after replacing the Registration Unit 283 Removing the Delivery Reverse Unit 289 Removing the Cassette 1 Lifter Drive Unit 290 Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Drive ...

Page 8: ... Log 350 Function Overview 350 Flow of Determining the Procedure for Obtaining Logs 352 Saving and Collecting Sublogs 353 7 Error Jam Alarm 365 Overview 366 Location Code 366 Pickup Position Code 366 Pickup size 366 Points to Note When Clearing MN CON 368 Points to Note When Clearing HDD 368 EError Code 369 EError Code Details 369 Jam Code 457 Jam Type 457 Jam screen display specification 457 Host...

Page 9: ...58 OPTION Specification setting mode 858 BOARD Option board setting mode 859 OPTION Specification setting mode 859 9 Installation 860 How to Check the Installation Procedure 861 Symbols 861 Installation 862 Host Mashine Installation 862 Setting the Dehumidification Switch 862 Document Scan Lock Kit B1 863 Points to Note at Installation 863 Installation Outline Drawing 863 Checking the Contents 863...

Page 10: ...07 Installation Procedure 907 NFC Kit C1 917 Points to Note at Installation 917 Installation Outline Drawing 917 Checking the Contents 917 Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power 917 Installation procedure 917 Setting after Installation 927 Connection Kit A1 for Bluetooth LE 928 Installation Outline Drawing 928 Checking the Contents 928 Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power 928 Installatio...

Page 11: ...Host machine_13 13 948 Software Counter Specifications 949 Removal 954 Removal 954 Target PCBs of Automatic Update 957 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored 958 Contents viii ...

Page 12: ...er Safety 2 Handling of Laser System 2 Turn power switch ON 3 Power Supply 3 Toner Safety 3 Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery 4 Notes Before it Works Serving 4 Points to Note at Cleaning 4 Notes on Assembly Disassembly 4 ...

Page 13: ... shown in the figure If you must open the cover and disable the interlock switches for servicing be sure to prevent the eye from exposure The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles EN60950 1 Dieses Gerät ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet Innerhalb des Geräts wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt der Augenschäden verursachen kann wenn man in diese...

Page 14: ...etely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the extension cord CAUTION Do not plug multiple cords together to an extension cord It may cause a fire or electrical shock The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible Toner Safety About Toner Toner is a nontoxic matter composed of plastic iron and a trace of pigme...

Page 15: ... fire Because dust accumulated in the surrounding area will absorb moisture and cause an insulation failure Points to Note at Cleaning When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling Notes on Assembly Disassembly Follow the items below to assemble disassemble the device 1 Disconnect the power pl...

Page 16: ...triangle mark take care not to apply too much force when tightening the screw The recommended torque value is shown below as a reference value Type of Screws RS tight W Sams Binding TP Fastened member Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin Tightening torque N m M4 Approx 1 6 Approx 1 6 Approx 1 6 Approx 0 8 Approx 1 6 Approx 0 8 Approx 1 6 Approx 0 8 M3 Approx 0 8 Approx 0 8 Approx 0 6 Ap...

Page 17: ...Product Overview 1 Product Lineup 7 Option 8 Features 11 Specifications 14 Parts Name 18 ...

Page 18: ...ader Printer imageRUNNER ADVANCE C355iF 255iF Reader Printer FAX imageRUNNER ADVANCE C355P Printer Model Type Model name Print speed imageRUNNER ADVANCE C355F 35 ppm imageRUNNER ADVANCE C355P imageRUNNER ADVANCE C355F The underlined numerical value indicates the print speed ppm print per minute 1 Product Overview 7 ...

Page 19: ...8 5 No Product name 1 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C355F imageRUNNER ADVANCE C355P 2 ADF Access Handle A1 3 Cassette Feeding Unit AJ1 4 Cassette Feeding Unit AE1 5 Cassette Feeding Unit AK1 6 FL Cassette AV1 7 Staple Finisher Z1 8 Cassette Heater Unit 39 1 Product Overview 8 ...

Page 20: ... Line Fax Board AT1 9 NFC Kit C1 10 Connection Kit A1 for Bluetooth LE License Products At the time of installation obtain the license number according to the license certificate included Then enter the obtained license number from the Control Panel of the machine The applicable functions are enabled There is no physical installation work at the time of installation No Product name 1 LIPS V Print ...

Page 21: ...me 6 READER EXTENSIONS F1 7 SCAN ENHANCE F1 8 Canon DGTL SIGNATURE A1 9 Document Scan Lock Kit B1 10 iR ADV Security Kit R1 for IEEE2600 Common Criteria Certification 11 Web Access Software K1 1 Product Overview 10 ...

Page 22: ...ndividual package ADF Separation Replacement Kit a set consisting of a Pickup Roller a Separation Roller FM1 P720 DR 203 In the procedure inclu ded in the package Drum Unit NPG 67 C EXV 49 GPR 53 On individual package Item Numbers of Consumables Specified on Host Machine reinforcement of the association between the host machine and the consumables Control Panel UI Item numbers are assigned to user...

Page 23: ...le Drum Unit 1 The item numbers of the Fixing Unit and ADF Maintenance Kit are not displayed 1 Can be displayed only in the case of COPIER OPTION USER P CRG LF 1 Individual package Describing the same item number also on the part s package enhances the association between the part and the host machine at the user site 1 Product Overview 12 ...

Page 24: ...bottom right is pressed since printing using only BK is still possible Waste Toner Container An orange button appears when Waste toner is near full Replacement not yet needed is displayed When completely full it is forcibly displayed by pop up Staple Displayed by pop up if there are no staples the next time stapling is executed Drum Unit 1 A button appears when 7 days have elapsed since the specif...

Page 25: ...i 1200dpi equivalent Maximum image guaran tee area 207 5 349 1 mm Maximum printable area 208 5 349 1 mm Warm up time After Powering ON imageRUNNER ADVANCE C355iFC C355i 30 seconds 1 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C355P 55 seconds 1 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C255i 34 seconds 1 1 If Quick Startup Settings for Main Power is set to On it takes 4 seconds imageRUNNER ADVANCE C355P 10 seconds until the key operation on t...

Page 26: ...mode duplex cassette4 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C355 C355P C355i C355iF 554 4 Wh 100V 556 1 Wh 120V 575 4 Wh 230V imageRUNNER ADVANCE C255 C255i C255iF 556 1 Wh 120V 575 4 Wh 230V Average power consumption at sandby mode imageRUNNER ADVANCE C355 C355P C355i C355iF 38 3 Wh 100V 38 9 Wh 120V 40 3 Wh 230V imageRUNNER ADVANCE C255 C255i C255iF 38 9 Wh 120V 40 3 Wh 230V Power consumptgion at sleep mode DeepS...

Page 27: ... FLS K16R F4A I LGL Custom paper size 2 1 Custom pa per size 2 2 Custom paper size 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Custom paper size 1 Yes No No No No A3 B4 A4 B5 11x17 LTR SRA3 12x18 EXEC E OFFICIO A OFFICIO A LTR A LTRR GLTR 13x19 K8 K16 No No No No No Plain 1 64 75 g m2 Plain 2 76 90 g m2 Recycled 1 64 75 g m2 Recycled 2 76 90 g m2 Color 1 64 75 g m2 A4R B5R A5R LGL LTRR STMTR EX EC R OFFICIO B OFFICIO M...

Page 28: ... LTR A LTRR GLTR R GLTR GLGL AFLS FLS 13x19 K8 K16 F4A I LGL No No No No No Pre Punched 1 A4R B5R A5R LGL LTRR STMTR EX EC R OFFICIO B OFFICIO M OFFICIO GLTR R GLGL AFLS FLS K16R F4A I LGL Custom paper size 2 1 Custom pa per size 2 2 Custom paper size 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Custom paper size 1 Yes No No No No A3 B4 A4 B5 11x17 LTR SRA3 12x18 EXEC E OFFICIO A OFFICIO A LTR A LTRR GLTR 13x19 K8 K16 N...

Page 29: ... ADF Reading Glass 15 Scanner Unit Front 16 Delivery Reverse Unit 17 Delivery Upper Roller 18 Reverse Roller 19 Right Door Unit 20 Duplex Feed Upper Roller 21 Duplex Feed Lower Roller 22 Fixing Assembly 23 Pressure Roller 24 Fixing Film 25 Toner Container Y 26 Toner Container M 27 Toner Container C 28 Toner Container Bk 29 ITB Unit 30 Primary Transfer Roller 31 Secondary Transfer Inner Roller 32 S...

Page 30: ... Tray Separation Roller Control Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 No Name No Name 1 Settings Registration key 9 Start key 2 Numeric keys 10 Main Power indicator 3 Energy Saver key 11 Error indicator 4 Counter Device Information key 12 Processing Data indicator 5 Brightness Adjustment key 13 Reset key 6 Settings key 14 ID Log In Out key 7 Clear key 15 NFC If equipped with NFC Kit B1 8 St...

Page 31: ...nology 2 Functional Configuration 21 Original Exposure System 22 Controller System 39 Laser Exposure System 43 Image Formation System 51 Fixing System 79 Pickup Feed System 91 External Auxiliary System 108 ...

Page 32: ...m and Pickup Feed System Pickup Laser Scanner Main Controller PCB DC Controller PCB Cassette Pickup Feed System Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing System ITB Reader ADF Transfer Fixing Delivery Deplexing Feed Drum Drum Drum Drum Original Exposure and Feed System Controller System Multi purpose Tray Pickup PC Laser Beam Paper Flow Signal Flow 2 Technology 21 ...

Page 33: ...crease in the supported original basis weight Specifications Reader Assembly Item Specification Function Original exposure Photo conductor LED Reading resolution 300 dpi x 600 dpi 600 dpi x 600 dpi Number of gradations 256 gradation Magnification ratio 25 to 400 in 1 increment Original reading sensor Number of lines of the Reading Sensor 3 lines R G B Original size detection Reader At copyboard re...

Page 34: ...ay stacking capacity 100sheets 50 g m2 to 80 g m2 Original size detection function No Mixed paper functions Mix of the same configuration Yes Mix of different configurations No Finished stamp function No Maximum document size At copyboard reading 215 9 mm x 355 6 mm When using the ADF 215 9 mm x 355 6 mm Document processing speed Stream reading Copy 1 sided 50 ipm 300 dpi x 600 dpi 2 sided 100 ipm...

Page 35: ...n Sensor ADF Unit Functional Configuration Functional configuration of the ADF in this equipment is shown below Main Controller PCB Original Feed Assembly Original Pickup Assembly Original Pickup Tray Original Scanning Assembly Front Side Original Path Original Scanning Assembly Rear Side Original Delivery Tray Parts Configuration 3 2 4 5 6 7 1 2 Technology 24 ...

Page 36: ...DF consists of a drive motor ADF Motor and 2 clutches ADF Pickup Clutch and ADF Registration Clutch The drive configuration is indicated below M4201 CL4200 CL4201 Code Name Role M4201 ADF Motor Operate the rollers in the ADF CL4200 ADF Pickup Clutch ON OFF of lifting operation of the Pickup Roller CL4201 ADF Registration Clutch ON OFF of lifting operation of the Registration Roller Unit List of Ro...

Page 37: ...ouble Feeding Detection PCB Transmission 3 JUSO T Double Feeding Detection PCB Reception 4 SR4206 Document End Sensor 5 REG Registration Sensor 6 SR5 ADF Cover Sensor 7 SR4204 Document Sensor Dust Detection Control When reading an original the original reading position is changed according to the presence absence of dust on the Stream Reading Glass or the Guide Plate of the ADF or image correction...

Page 38: ...f a job and image correction is performed if dust is detected at that position Related service mode Adj dust detect level ppr intvl DADF Service mode COPIER OPTION IMG RDR DFDST L1 ON OFF dust detection ppr intvl back Service mode COPIER OPTION IMG RDR DF2DSTL1 Image Processing The functions of the PCB related to image processing are shown below Main Controller PCB Shading correction executed per ...

Page 39: ...n of the LED Variations in luminance between at the position of the Standard White Plate and at the reading position To correct unevenness of the Reading Sensor output shading correction is performed In shading correction there is a type of shading correction that is executed per job Shading Correction Common to Reader and ADF Shading correction is performed for each scanning of original With this...

Page 40: ...FHPHQW FRUUHFWLRQ LQ YHUWLFDO VFDQQLQJ GLUHFWLRQ 5 RORU GLVSODFHPHQW FRUUHFWLRQ LQ YHUWLFDO VFDQQLQJ GLUHFWLRQ 1 line HIRUH FRUUHFWLRQ IWHU FRUUHFWLRQ As for the color displacement correction value in the vertical scanning direction there are 6 types of reader scans as shown below These correction values have been adjusted at the time of shipment and stored as service mode values In COPIER ADJUST ...

Page 41: ...r mode 60dpi COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST4CL0 Channel 0 COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST4CL1 Channel 1 COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST4CL2 Channel 2 COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST4CL3 Channel 3 COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST4CL4 Channel 4 COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST4CL5 Channel 5 Adj CIS ch offset front clr mode 30dpi COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST CL0 Channel 0 COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST CL1 Channel 1 COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST CL2 Channel 2 COPIER ADJUST C...

Page 42: ...The operation sequence of original scan by the ADF is shown below Setting the original 1st sheet pickup separation 1st sheet scanning 2nd sheet Preparing 1st sheet trailing edge detection 2nd sheet pickup separation 1st sheet arch creation 2 Technology 31 ...

Page 43: ...1st sheet delivery 1st sheet end 2nd sheet end 2nd sheet arch creation 2nd sheet scanning 2nd sheet trailing edge detection 2nd sheet delivery 2 Technology 32 ...

Page 44: ... for the rear side The Reading Sensor consists of 3 lines R G and B and all lines are used at reading Related error codes E302 000x Error in paper front shading E302 0001 Error in paper front white shading E302 0002 Error in paper front black shading E302 0003 Error in paper front shading E302 010x Error in paper back shading E302 0101 Error in paper back white shading E302 0102 Error in paper bac...

Page 45: ...302 0102 Error in paper back black shading E302 0103 Error in paper back shading Duplex Reading Control 2 sided originals are read using simultaneous duplex reading With one feed the Scanner Unit of the Reader Unit reads the front side and the Scanner Unit of the ADF reads the back side so that both sides can be read without reversing the paper Scanner Unit ADF Scanner Unit Reader Scanning positio...

Page 46: ... after completion of the pickup operation the Pickup Roller Unit is lifted up M4201 CL4200 1 3 2 No Name 1 Pickup Roller 2 Feed Roller 3 Separation Roller M4201 ADF Motor CL4200 ADF Pickup Clutch Original Feed Control With this machine an arch is formed at the location where the Registration Roller is allocated in order to correct skew and increase the feed accuracy 1 2 No Name 1 Registration Roll...

Page 47: ...nd the Lead Roller perform double feed detection Once it is judged that double feed has occurred the machine stops operation due to a jam At the start of a job the sensor level is checked while there is no original and the threshold value for double feed detection is calculated During a job the Document End Sensor SR4206 detects the leading edge and trailing edge of each sheet of the original and ...

Page 48: ... small Types of jam Feed System Location Jam code Jam type Sensor name Sensor number 01 0001 Delay Registration Sensor REG 0002 Stationary 0042 Stationary 0009 Delay Document End Sensor SR4206 0049 Delay 0010 Stationary 0050 Stationary 0013 Delay Delivery Sensor SR2 0014 Stationary 0053 Delay 0054 Stationary Double Feed Detection Location Jam code Jam type Sensor name Sensor number 01 0020 Double ...

Page 49: ...vered by opening and then closing the cover to remove jammed paper 2 Limited functions jam is a jam for preventing an original to be left inside the machine when a problem which requires the machine moves to limited functions mode occurs If an error occurs for some reasons a jam message is displayed to prompt the user to perform jam removal After that an error is displayed and the device enters li...

Page 50: ...ion I F RAM Temporarily storage of image data Capacity of 2 GB for controller control 1 GB for image process ing USB port USB2 0 Device I F USB3 0 Host I F HDD 2 5 inch SATA I F Standard 250 GB Address book security information passwords certificates image data preference Flash PCB Storage of system software 4 GB TPM PCB This PCB generates and stores encryption keys Management Settings Data Manage...

Page 51: ...003 ADF Motor J4004 ADF FAN and SR5 Power Supply Cable J4005 Reader Motor CIS Unit HP Sensor SR3 ADF Open Close Sensor SR4 J4007 ADF control J4501 For the HDMI typeC Control Panel J4502 For the miniUSB Control Panel Power Supply J4503 For the USB Port on the front of the miniUSB J4505 For expansion of the FAX 2 Line option J4506 Signal Power Connector for the FAX 1 Line J4508 Power Supply Cable J4...

Page 52: ...up the progress bar and the active PCB are not synchronized For this reason the progress bar cannot be utilized for troubleshooting For information about troubleshooting refer to Related error codes major error codes shown below Related error codes major error codes E602 0001 HDD detection error E614 0001 Flash PCB detection error E614 0002 Error in file system on the Flash PCB E614 4001 Error in ...

Page 53: ...hen the machine detects a person staying in front of it in the area where the sensor works for more than a certain period of time it automatically recovers from sleep mode It judges whether the person is a user or a passerby and controls not to perform recovery triggered by passersby in order to reduce unnecessary power consumption Criteria for judging whether a person is a user or passerby are sh...

Page 54: ...e signal input from the DC Controller PCB The machine uses the 2 beam method that enables exposure of 2 beams per scanning direction and adopts the 1 polygon 4 laser method to realize a compact size Video signal APC signal BD signal Scanner Motor control signal Photosensitive Drum DC Controller PCB UN04 ITOP Laser ON OFF signal Main Controller PCB UN81 Y M C K Laser Assembly Polygon Mirror Scanner...

Page 55: ... Driver PCB 4 Reflection Mirror 2 BD Circuit 5 Polygon Mirror 3 Imaging Lens 6 Scanner Motor Specifications Item Description Number of Laser Scanner Units 1 Number of laser beams 2 beams Resolution 600 dpi Number of Polygon Mirror surfaces 4 surfaces 2 Technology 44 ...

Page 56: ...e Laser Scanner Unit 1 4 1 2 3 3 No Name No Name 1 Reflection Mirror 3 Imaging Lens 2 Polygon Mirror 4 Y M C Bk Laser Driver PCB Laser ON OFF Control Purpose Turns the laser beam ON and OFF according to the combination of laser control signals Execution timing After turning ON the power Control description The DC Controller PCB switches between four modes Forced OFF mode APC mode Print mode and St...

Page 57: ... position in the horizontal scanning direction Execution timing When printing is started for each line Control description 1 The Main Controller PCB forcibly activates the laser diode of the Y M C Bk Laser Driver PCB by executing the Bk laser control signal in APC mode 2 The laser beam of the Bk laser has a BD circuit in the scanning light path and is incident on the BD Circuit 3 The BD Circuit de...

Page 58: ...eft standard Y_VDO M_VDO C_VDO Bk_VDO Main Controller PCB UN81 DC Controller PCB UN04 Y Laser M Laser C Laser Bk Laser BD Y M C K Laser Driver PCB UN05 BD Sensor Vertical Scanning Synchronization Control Purpose Aligns the write start position in the vertical scanning direction Execution timing At printing Control description 1 When the DC Controller PCB receives a print order it detects an intern...

Page 59: ...er Motor rotation speed is controlled by the DC Controller PCB 1 The DC Controller PCB outputs Scanner Motor control signals acceleration signals and deceleration signals to the Scanner Motor to rotate the Polygon Mirror 2 The DC Controller PCB controls the Scanner Motor rotation speed to be constant by reference to the Scanner Motor rotation speed signal From when the Scanner Motor starts rotatio...

Page 60: ...ht intensity for each line Execution timing For each line before writing the image Control description 1 The Main Controller PCB outputs the APC signal to the Laser Driver IC in the Y M C Bk Laser Driver PCB 2 The APC mode is set for the Laser Driver ICs of each Y M C Bk Laser Driver PCB and the laser diode of each color is forcibly activated The photo diode PD monitors the laser diode LD and each...

Page 61: ... Motor 2 The DC Controller PCB calculates the correction value from the displacement of the BD interval 3 The write start position is corrected by adjusting the write start timing based on the above correction value Dustproof Shutter Purpose Prevents dropped toner getting attached on the Dustproof Glass when installing removing the cartridge Execution timing At image formation and when the Waste T...

Page 62: ...ns Item Function Method Photosensitive Drum Material OPC Drum diameter 30 mm in diameter Cleaning Cleaning Blade Process speed imageRUNNER ADVANCE C355 200 mm s imageRUNNER ADVANCE C255 135 mm s Drum Heater None Developing Assembly Developing method Dry 2 component developing Toner level detection Yes the ATR Sensor is also used Primary charging Charging method Roller charging Toner Container Tone...

Page 63: ...sitive Drum M Photosensitive Drum ITB cleaning block ITB Rotating direction of ITB photosensitive drum Flow of print paper Y Photosensitive Drum No Block name Process name Description 1 Static latent image forma tion block Primary charging The surface of the Photosensitive Drum is charged to make a uniform neg ative potential 2 Laser exposure Emission of the laser light forms a static latent image...

Page 64: ...ck ITB cleaning The Cleaning Blade removes the residual toner attached on the ITB 9 Drum cleaning block Drum cleaning The Cleaning Blade removes the residual toner attached to the Photosen sitive Drum Primary Charging Overview This machine uses the roller charging method for primary charging Photosensitive Drum Primary Charging Roller Primary Charging Bias Control DC charging is a distinguishing f...

Page 65: ...um Unit Overview The Drum Unit consists of the Developing Assembly and Drum Drum Assembly Developing Assembly Developing Overview Drive Configuration CL01 CL02 CL03 CL04 M03 Developing Cylinder Developing Motor Developing Cylinder Clutch Y M C Bk Developer Feed Screw B Developer Feed Screw A ATR Sensor Y M C Bk UN34 UN37 2 Technology 54 ...

Page 66: ...eloper Feed Screw UN34 to UN37 ATR Sensor Y M C Bk To detect the ratio of developer toner carrier in the Developing Assembly Developing Bias Control A toner image is formed on the Photosensitive Drum by attaching toner to the Developing Cylinder Control description The developing bias AC DC negative which has been generated on the Developing High voltage PCB UN06 is applied to the Developing Cylin...

Page 67: ...detection error E012 0001 CL Drum Motor startup error E012 0002 CL Drum Motor speed error E012 0003 CL Drum Motor lock detection error Drum Unit detection Whether the Drum Unit is installed or not is detected Execution condition timing At power on at recovery from sleep mode of 4 or more hours when the Front Door Right Door is opened closed Detection description This machine detects the presence a...

Page 68: ...ent Completion of replacement Alarm code Drum Unit LF setting value reaching alarm 1 None Drum replacement detection alarm Drum memory detection error Message machine operation None Replace the Drum Unit None Detection timing Depends on the service mode set ting 2 7 days after prior delivery alarm is sent Default Hide 3 When the Drum Unit is detected Detected to location Drum Unit Memory PCB Drum ...

Page 69: ...e Bk Drum _ ITB Motor Parts name Role ITB Unit Toner on the Photosensitive Drum is transferred to a paper ITB Intermediate Transfer Belt Toner on the Photosensitive Drum is transferred to a paper Primary Transfer Roller Toner on the Photosensitive Drum is attracted to the ITB Secondary Transfer Inner Roller The ITB is driven ITB Cleaning Blade Toner on the ITB is scraped Waste Toner Feed Screw Res...

Page 70: ...Clutch Y M C Bk Switching drive of the Developing Cylinder ON and OFF Related error codes E010 0001 Bk Drum_ITB Motor startup error E010 0002 Bk Drum_ITB Motor speed error E010 0003 Bk Drum_ITB Motor lock detection error Primary Transfer Roller Engagement Disengagement Control The Primary Transfer Rollers are usually disengaged All the Primary Transfer Rollers are engaged in color mode and only th...

Page 71: ... is 80 deg C or less At power on when the Right Door is opened closed at times other than at jam removal When the internal temperature has changed by more than the specified value since the last ATVC control At paper interval equivalent to 80 images during continuous printing At last rotation after accumulated 50 images Control description 1 Monitor current value of the primary transfer DC bias is...

Page 72: ...ansfer bias can be switched by color and it is possible to turn OFF the bias of the color which will not be used Primary Transfer High voltage PCB UN03 DC Controller PCB UN04 Primary Transfer DC Primary Transfer Roller NOTE The ATVC control secures transfer performance that is not affected by change in resistance caused by the environment as well as deterioration of the Primary Transfer Roller and...

Page 73: ...arts The Steering Roller has a configuration to rotate together with the rotation of the ITB but the sliding members at both ends do not rotate ITB Frictional parts Frictional parts Steering roller Control description The mechanism for preventing displacement is shown below 1 The ITB is displaced toward one side 2 The belt is displaced and driven onto the sliding member at the end This sliding mem...

Page 74: ...r of transparency to execute ITB cleaning COPIER OPTION CLEANING OHP PTH Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Cleaning Control Soiling at the back of the sheet caused by soiling of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller can be prevented Control timing When image stabilization control generation of patch image on the ITB is executed during warm up rotation At last rotation After executing the image stabili...

Page 75: ...es positive potential at the back of the paper This reduces electrostatic absorption force of the paper so that paper can be easily separated Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Static Eliminator Drum Cleaning Drum cleaning control To clean residual toner on the photosensitive drum Residual toner on the drum is scraped by the drum cleaning blade Then rotation of the was...

Page 76: ...hen auto gradation adjustment full adjustment is executed Gradation density of the patch pattern on the test print is scanned by the Reader to create an image density correction table The foregoing table corrects image gradation density characteristics which change according to the environment change and deterioration of the Photosensitive Drum Control timing When auto gradation adjustment full ad...

Page 77: ... sheets or more At last rotation on a specified print basis 30 sheets or more At last rotation for PASCAL Control or D half Control Control description 1 The Main Controller PCB outputs patch data in each color Y M C and Bk to the DC Controller PCB 2 The DC Controller PCB forms the patch pattern of each color Y M C and Bk on the ITB Total of 12 patterns 3 patch patterns for each color 3 The DC Con...

Page 78: ...ment correction is performed based on the above patch patterns Type of control Correction description Correction in horizon tal scanning direction Write start correction Write start timing in horizontal scanning direction is changed Entire area magnification ratio correction Pixels in horizontal scanning direction is increased reduced at the both edges of the image Correction in vertical scanning ...

Page 79: ...y Toner Container Claw Lever Shutter Toner Container Detection The presence absence of the Toner Container is detected The Bottle Rotation Sensors Y M C Bk PS06 PS07 PS08 PS09 are located as shown in the figure below which turn ON when a Toner Container is inserted to detect the presence of the Toner Container ON OFF Toner Container Cut off Bottle Rotation Sensor Cut off Flag Bottle State Detectio...

Page 80: ...rong item no may be inserted A Toner Container with a wrong item number is inserted Toner cartridge may be malfunctioning A Toner Container that may be malfunctioning is inserted Wrong cartridge color may be inserted A Toner Container of a wrong color is set The correct Toner Container is set ATR Auto Toner Replenishment Control Toner is supplied to the Developing Assembly to make the ratio betwee...

Page 81: ...ping Motor Toner Log Connector Y M C Bk UN38 39 40 41 Bottle Rotation Sensor Y M C Bk PS6 7 8 9 ATR Sensor Y M C Bk UN34 35 36 37 Hopper Unit DC Controller PCB UN04 Developing Assembly supply count Main Controller PCB UN81 Video Count Value ATR Sensor result Related error codes ATR Sensor each color output error E020 01A8 Y E020 02A8 M E020 03A8 C E020 04A8 Bk E020 01B8 Y E020 02B8 M E020 03B8 C E...

Page 82: ...ly to the gears on the side toward which the gear moved and the Toner Bottle rotates Bk C 3 When the motor rotates in the reverse direction the gear in the center moves to the opposite direction 4 The driving force is transmitted only to the gears on the side toward which the gear moved and the Toner Bottle rotates Bk C Toner Supply Control Toner is supplied from the Toner Container to the Develop...

Page 83: ...lt of ATR control Toner supply from the Hopper Unit to the Developing Assembly is synced with the To ner Feed Screw Operation of the host machine The Bottle Motor YM M09 and the Bottle Motor CK M10 are driven The Toner Feed Screw is turned to supply toner to the Developing Assembly The supply amount is determined based on the output value at the time of ATR Sensor output and the time of video coun...

Page 84: ... displaying the alarm can be changed in the range from 0 to 40 by configuring the settings in the following service modes COPIER OPTION FNC SW T DLV BK COPIER OPTION FNC SW T DLV CL 2 Alarm code created by UGW it is not recorded in the LUI log Since this alarm is generated only once per bottle it will no longer be generated for the same bottle once this alarm has been generated 3 The message can b...

Page 85: ...Detection of Completion of Toner Replacement When the Toner Bottle is replaced the completion of the replacement work is detected When the completion of the replacement work is detected the toner supply counter is reset Detection timing When a replacement of Toner Container is detected Detected to location Toner Log Connector Y M C Bk UN38 39 40 41 Related alarm codes New Toner Bottle replacement ...

Page 86: ...Toner Screw Waste toner inside the Waste Toner Container is raked Registration Motor Rotates the Waste Toner Feed Screws Waste Toner Sensor PCB Detects the toner amount in the Waste Toner Container Waste Toner Container Full Level Detection Toner level accumulated in the Waste Toner Container is detected M07 Waste Toner Container Toner low Sensor ON Waste Toner Container preparation warning Sensor...

Page 87: ...nding on the usage environment conditions The setting of the number of sheets that can be fed after waste toner full level is detected can be changed in the following service mode Lv 2 Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW WT FL LM Related alarm codes 11 Waste Toner Box 11 0001 Waste Toner Container full 11 0010 Display of Waste Toner Box preparation warning Related service mode Display hide the Waste...

Page 88: ...or higher Specified value or lower Power on None Long When recovering from sleep mode of 24 hours or more Long When recovering from sleep mode of at least 4 hours and less than 24 hours Short When recovering from sleep mode of less than 4 hours None None Warm up rotation con trol Long Short None Reference Primary Transfer Roller disengagement control Executed Executed Not executed Primary Transfer...

Page 89: ...crew rotation detection error E021 0120 Y E021 0220 M E021 0320 C E025 0x10 Bottle Motor error E025 0110 Y E025 0210 M E025 0310 C E025 0x68 No toner detection error E025 0168 Y E025 0268 M E025 0368 C NOTE When color printing is limited or there is no color toner the following Settings Registration menus cannot be executed Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adj...

Page 90: ...S12 Fixing Film Separation Guide Fixing Delivery Upper Guide Fixing Delivery Detection Flag Fixing Inlet Guide Specifications Item Function Method Fixing method On demand fixing Fixing Heater Ceramic Heater Protection function Main Thermistor Sub Thermistor Component Parts Pressure Roller Fixing Film 2 Technology 79 ...

Page 91: ...r TH01 Main Thermistor This is engaged with the heater Temperature control and abnormal temperature rise detection TH02 Sub Thermistor Rear This is engaged with the heater Abnormal temperature rise detection and edge temperature rise control TH03 Sub Thermistor Front TP01 Fixing Thermoswitch This is not engaged with the heater AC power supply is shut down at detection of a failure PS13 Fixing Pres...

Page 92: ...ture to the target level and keep it during printing Startup initial rotation temperature control Print temperature control Paper interval temperature control Down Sequence Control This is a control to prevent fixing failure due to temperature increase at the edge or temperature decrease Productivity throughput decreases Down sequence when feeding small size paper Down sequence when switching pape...

Page 93: ...y mode At completion of jam removal When opening and closing the Right Door This control is performed regardless of the following service mode setting Setting of whether to execute flying start Lv 2 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FLYING Control description The temperature control target is set and the Fixing Motor is controlled at half speed to start operation The control continues for 15 sec at most until...

Page 94: ...perature is controlled to keep the target temperature according to the detected temperature of the Main Thermistor Paper interval temperature control The paper interval temperature is decreased to prevent temperature increase when the paper interval becomes wider than normal conditions at down sequence 1 Paper Interval Temperature Target temperature during printing 0 to 20 deg C 2 1 At down sequen...

Page 95: ...own sequence is entered Down sequence is performed in a stepwise manner If the Sub Thermistor detection temperature reaches the designated temperature or higher during printing the down sequence increases by one level and the print speed ppm decreases each time this condition continues for a period of 1 second Control ends at job completion Control description Increasing paper interval to make lon...

Page 96: ...to 90 g m2 2 to 25 Recycled 3 91 to 105 g m2 2 to 25 100 17 Heavy 1 106 to 128 g m2 2 to 17 Heavy 2 129 to 163 g m2 2 to 17 100 15 Heavy 3 164 to 220 g m2 2 to 15 100 17 Envelope 2 to 17 A5 135 25 Thin 60 to 63 g m2 2 to 25 Plain 1 64 to 75 g m2 2 to 25 Plain 2 76 to 90 g m2 2 to 25 Plain 3 91 to 105 g m2 2 to 25 Recycled 1 64 to 75 g m2 2 to 25 Recycled 2 76 to 90 g m2 2 to 25 Recycled 3 91 to 10...

Page 97: ... This down sequence is terminated at the point when any of the following conditions is satisfied When the detected temperature of the Main Thermistor front rear edge of the Fixing Heater and Sub Thermistor front rear edge of the Fixing Film is at or below the designated temperature When specified time has elapsed after the preceding sheet passed the fixing nip Fixing Film Unit Engagement Disengage...

Page 98: ...ssure Roller Pressure Release Gear Pressure Release Cam Pressure Plate Pressure Release Gear Slit Fixing Pressure Release Sensor PS13 Disengaged Related error code E009 Fixing engagement error E009 0001 Fixing engagement timeout error E009 0002 Fixing disengagement timeout error E009 0003 Fixing engagement retry error E009 0004 Fixing disengagement retry error E009 0005 Fixing disengagement timeou...

Page 99: ...l description This control uses the Arch Sensor PS11 to detect the paper arch between the transfer nip and fixing nip and changes the drive speed of the Fixing Motor as follows to ensure formation of proper arches 1 When the leading edge of the paper passes through the secondary transfer nip area the Fixing Motor drive speed is decelerated and the decelerated speed is maintained until the leading ...

Page 100: ... Sub Thermistor Rear high temperature detection error A004 Main Thermistor high temperature detection error A005 Sub Thermistor Front high temperature detection error A006 Sub Thermistor Rear high temperature detection error E002 Error in temperature rising of Fixing Assembly A001 Main Thermistor temperature increase detection error A002 Main Thermistor open circuit detection error A003 Sub Thermi...

Page 101: ... Second and subsequent error detection E001 Error E001 is displayed The detail code is Axxx E002 Error avoidance jam 00 0CF1 is displayed Error E002 is displayed The detail code is Axxx E003 Error E003 is displayed The detail code is Axxx If the above errors occur turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine When approx 3000 sheets or more are printed after the first and subsequent error det...

Page 102: ...ustom size Horizontal scanning 98 0 mm to 216 0 mm Vertical scanning 190 5 mm to 355 6 mm Multi purpose Tray A4 B5 A5 LGL LTR STMT EXEC K16 Postcard Envelope COM10 No 10 Monarch ISO C5 DL Nagagata 3 Yougatanaga 3 Custom size Horizontal scanning 98 0 mm to 216 0 mm Vertical scan ning 148 0 mm to 355 6 mm Paper weight Cassette 60 to 163 g m2 Multi purpose Tray 60 to 220 g m2 Paper size switching Cas...

Page 103: ...e registration Roller 3 Duplex Feed Upper Roller 11 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller 4 Pressure Roller 12 Multi purpose Tray Feed Roller 5 Fixing Film 13 Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller 6 Secondary Transfer Inner Roller 14 Cassette 1 Separation Roller 7 Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 15 Cassette 1 Feed Roller 8 Duplex Feed Lower Roller 16 Cassette 1 Pickup Roller 2 Technology 92 ...

Page 104: ...te 1 Paper Sensor PS12 Delivery Sensor PS03 Multi purpose Tray Paper Sensor PS14 Delivery Paper Full Sensor PS04 Pre Registration Sensor PS18 Cassette 1 Paper Surface Sensor PS05 Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor PS20 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor PS10 Multi Purpose Tray HP Sensor SW09 Cassette 1 Size Switch Route of Drive M11 M07 M05 M08 M04 M02 SL02 M06 2 Technology 93 ...

Page 105: ... 1 _ Multi purpose Tray Pickup Motor M05 rotates to pick up the surface layer paper and the Cassette Feed Roller 2 and Cassette Separation Roller 3 feed only 1 sheet of paper to the feed path 3 It is then moved from the Pre registration Roller 4 to the Registration Roller 5 by rotation of the Pre registration Motor M06 If the Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor PS05 has detected paper at the start of pickup ...

Page 106: ... 0013 Cassette 3 Pickup Retry Error 04 0014 Cassette 4 Pickup Retry Error Paper Size Detection Control The paper size in the cassette is automatically detected by the Cassette 1 Size Switch SW09 after the position of the Guide Plate is adjusted and the cassette is installed in the host machine By shifting the Guide Plate concavo convex area of the Cassette Size Dial is switched and the Cassette Si...

Page 107: ... indicates absence of paper and Not detected indicates presence of paper Paper Surface Sensor It detects the surface of paper Detected indicates presence of the paper surface and Not detected indicates absence of the paper surface Paper Level Sensor It detects the paper level Detected indicates that the paper level is low approx 50 sheets or less and Not detected indicates that there is sufficient...

Page 108: ... Adjustment of the threshold value for detection of the cassette paper level COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ CST VLM1 Cassette 1 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ CST VLM2 Cassette 2 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ CST VLM3 Cassette 3 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ CST VLM4 Cassette 4 Paper Detection Control The presence absence of paper is detected by the following sensors and switch Cassette 1 size switch SW09 Cassette 1 Paper Surface ...

Page 109: ...ror 04 0002 Cassette 2 Lifter Error 04 0003 Cassette 3 Lifter error 04 0004 Cassette 4 Lifter error Multi purpose Tray Pickup Assembly Overview Paper on the Multi purpose Tray of the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit is picked up by the rotation of the Cassette 1_Multi purpose Tray Pickup Motor M05 The Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller is lowered by the rotation of the Cassette 1_Multi purpose Tray Pi...

Page 110: ... 1 mm or more in length Heavy 4 5 Label or Transparency Paper Detection Presence absence of paper is detected by the Multi purpose Tray Paper Sensor PS03 When the sensor detects that paper has run out the cassette is automatically changed to a cassette containing paper of the same size and type at a different paper source Paper Size Detection This machine does not have a function for detecting pap...

Page 111: ...feed speed and align the paper with the image without stopping the paper at the registration position in order to shorten the paper interval and improve the throughput Stop Registration Control This control stops the paper at the registration position aligns the image on the ITB with the paper at a specified timing and then resumes paper feed 2 Technology 100 ...

Page 112: ...h this machine judges that a jam has occurred and the operation is stopped without delivering the paper Jam code 0D91 Paper size mismatches are judged on the basis of the following criteria The difference between the paper length detected by the Cassette 1 Size Switch and the paper length calculated on the basis of the time it took the paper to get past the Pre Registration Sensor PS04 is 20 mm or...

Page 113: ...cation is received printing stops Delivery Paper Full Detection Flag Delivery point Delivery Paper Full Sensor PS14 Reverse Duplex Assembly Reverse Flapper Operation The Reverse Flapper operates in accordance with the Reverse Motor M08 When the Reverse Motor is stopped Feed to the Delivery Outlet When the Reverse Motor is operating Feed to the Reverse Mouth M08 Reverse Flapper 2 Technology 102 ...

Page 114: ...Sensor PS12 Duplex Standby Control When paper is detected the Duplex Sensor PS01 estimates the paper interval with the preceding paper If the necessary paper interval can be secured the paper is fed to the pre registration If the necessary paper interval cannot be secured the paper stays at the duplex standby position After recalculated standby time has passed re pickup is executed M08 M06 SL02 Du...

Page 115: ...been finished the paper stops before the nip of the Duplex Feed Lower Roller When the process speed reaches the specified speed after registration control of the succeeding paper the Reverse Motor M08 is rotated to start paper feed SL02 M06 M08 Duplex Feed Lower Roller Duplex Sensor PS01 Pre registration Sensor PS04 Pre registration Roller 2 Technology 104 ...

Page 116: ...s no longer transmitted After the designated time has elapsed and the Duplex Solenoid SL02 is turned OFF transmission of the Pre registration Motor M06 drive starts which drives the Duplex Feed Lower Roller to resume paper feed M08 M06 SL02 Duplex standby position Duplex Feed Lower Roller Duplex Feed Upper Roller Duplex Sensor PS01 Delivery Sensor PS12 Jam Detection This machine detects document j...

Page 117: ...hine PS12 PS11 PS01 PS04 PS05 No Name No Name PS1 Duplex Sensor PS11 Arch Sensor PS4 Pre Registration Sensor PS12 Delivery Sensor PS5 Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor Cassette PS101 Cassette Module AE1 2 Technology 106 ...

Page 118: ...PS103 PS102 PS101 Cassette Feeding Unit AJ1 PS101 Cassette Feeding Unit AK1 No Name PS101 Cassette 2 Pullout Sensor PS102 Cassette 3 Pullout Sensor PS103 Cassette 4 Pullout Sensor 2 Technology 107 ...

Page 119: ...2 118 000 000 000 000 120V UL model type 1 Total 1 Total Black 1 Copy Full Color Single Col or Small Print Full Color Sin gle Color Small 1 1 1 1 US 101 108 230 322 000 000 000 000 120V UL model type 2 Total 2 Total Black 2 Copy Full Color Single Col or Small Print Full Color Sin gle Color Small 1 1 1 1 US 102 109 230 322 000 000 000 000 230V General model Total 1 Total Black 1 Copy Print Full Col...

Page 120: ...e Color Small 1 1 1 1 1 CN 101 113 123 000 000 000 000 000 Description of symbols Large Large size paper when paper length exceeds 324 mm in paper feed direction Small Small size paper when paper length is 324 mm or less in paper feed direction Total When a sheet of paper is delivered the counter is advanced by 1 2 Sided The counter is advanced by 1 for paper delivered in 2 sided mode Change the c...

Page 121: ...n Staple Finisher Delivery position Print mode 1 sided print 2nd side of 2 sided print 1st side of 2 sided print Count up timing Host machine Delivery Tray Delivery Sensor PS12 Duplex Sensor PS01 Staple Finisher Feed Path Sensor S2 Fan Location of Fans FM03 FM01 FM05 FM04 No Name Role Error Codes FM01 Drum Unit Suction Cooling Fan To cool the Developing Assembly and laser E806 0100 E806 0101 FM03 ...

Page 122: ...ling Fan Half speed Full speed Full speed FM0 4 Duplex Cooling Fan Half speed Half speed Full speed Full speed Full speed FM0 5 Power Supply Cool ing Fan Full speed Full speed Full speed Full speed Full speed Half speed Half speed Half speed FM0 6 Controller Cooling Fan Full speed Full speed Half speed Full speed Full speed Full speed Half speed Half speed Full speed Half speed Fan drive sequence ...

Page 123: ...el ADF Laser Driver PCB Finisher High Voltage Motors Fans Solenoids Clutches 24V AC DC DC DC 24V 5V J322 J315 TP J302 12V DC DC J323 J313 J321 3 3V Remote 12V 24V 24V Interlock 5V 5V Interlock All night Power Supply PCB Main Power Switch FET Power Supply Fan Cassette Pedestal Power saving Function Overview There are Standby and Sleep as the power supply mode of this machine Further Sleep is divide...

Page 124: ...ile only all night power is supplied When any of the following Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep applies transition to this mode does not occur Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep Mode Check Items Settings of Settings Registration When the following settings are enabled in the Settings Registration menu the machine does not enter Deep Sleep mode The corresponding items are shown below Pref...

Page 125: ...in Power Supply Switch is OFF power is supplied to the following PCBs Quick startup setting ON Quick startup setting OFF Low voltage Power Supply PCB Power is supplied Power is supplied All night Power Supply PCB Power is supplied Power is supplied Main Controller PCB Power is supplied OFF NOTE The quick startup function can be set from Settings Registration Settings Registration Preferences Timer...

Page 126: ...power of the machine in 20 seconds after turning OFF the main power Startup after 8 hours or more have passed since the power of this product was turned OFF When turning ON the main power of the machine after turning OFF the main power from the Remote UI The next time the power is turned ON after occurrence of the error code The next time the power is turned ON after shifting to the service mode s...

Page 127: ...Periodical Service 3 Periodically Replacement Parts 117 Consumable parts 118 ...

Page 128: ...Periodically Replacement Parts There are no periodically replacement parts in this machine 3 Periodical Service 117 ...

Page 129: ...r Outer Roller FM1 C318 1 150 000 sheets DRBL 1 2TR ROLL 3 Waste Toner Container FM0 0015 1 30 000 sheets Color ratio 30 DRBL 1 WST TNR 4 Fixing System Fixing Assem bly FM0 0033 100V 1 150 000 sheets DRBL 1 FX UNIT FM0 0072 120V FM0 0073 230V 5 Original Expo sure and Feed System ADF Pickup Unit FM1 L782 1 50 000 sheets DRBL 2 DF PU RL 6 ADF Separa tion Roller Unit FM1 N521 1 50 000 sheets DRBL 2 D...

Page 130: ...reface 120 List of Parts 121 External Cover Interior System 139 Original Exposure Feed System 167 Controller System 189 Laser Exposure System 216 Image Formation System 221 Fixing System 254 Pickup Feed System 261 Cleaning Procedure 296 ...

Page 131: ...al rule 6 Ground yourself by touching the metal part of the printer before handling the PCB to reduce the possibility of damage caused by static electricity 7 When you replace the part that the rating plate or the product code label is attached be sure to remove the rating plate or the product code label and put it to the new part Points to Note when Tightening a Screw For reduction in weight thin...

Page 132: ...List of Parts External Internal Cover ADF 1 4 5 2 3 No Name 1 Original Tray 2 ADF Base 3 Feeder Cover 4 ADF Rear Cover 5 ADF Side Guide Plate 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 121 ...

Page 133: ... Reader 1 5 4 3 2 No Name 1 Copyboard Glass Unit 2 Wifi Cover 3 Reader Rear Cover 1 4 Reader Rear Cover 2 5 Reader Motor Cover 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 122 ...

Page 134: ...r Cover 5 Device Port Cover 6 Left Upper Cover 7 Delivery Tray 8 Delivery Cover 9 Reverse Tray 10 Upper Cover 11 Control Panel Front Cover 12 Control Panel Rear Hinge Cover 13 Control Panel Side Cover 14 Control Panel Tilt Cover 15 Control Panel Slide Cover 16 Control Panel Rear Cover 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 123 ...

Page 135: ... Lower Cover 6 Right Front Cover 7 Main Power Switch Cover 8 Right Upper Cover 9 Right Cover 10 Right Cover Open Close Lever 11 Right Rear Cover 12 Environment Heater Switch Cover 13 Rear Upper Cover 14 Right Rear Lower Cover 15 Multi purpose Tray 16 Multi purpose Tray Extension Tray 17 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Side Guide Plate 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 124 ...

Page 136: ... 1 3 2 No Name 1 Front Inner Right Cover 2 Front Inner Lower Cover 3 Front Inner Upper Cover List of Main Unit ADF 1 2 3 No Name 1 ADF Unit 2 ADF Pickup Unit 3 ADF Separation Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 125 ...

Page 137: ...0 11 6 7 8 9 4 5 3 2 1 No Name 1 Toner Bottle Mount Unit Y 2 Toner Bottle Mount Unit M 3 Toner Bottle Mount Unit C 4 Toner Bottle Mount Unit Bk 5 Control Panel Unit 6 ITB Unit 7 Drum Unit Y 8 Drum Unit M 9 Drum Unit C 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 126 ...

Page 138: ...5 6 7 8 No Name 1 Delivery Reverse Unit 2 Fixing Assembly 3 Multi purpose Tray 4 Right Cover Unit 5 Registration Drive Unit 6 Registration Patch Sensor Unit 7 Registration Paper Pickup Unit 8 Cassette 1 Auto Close Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 127 ...

Page 139: ...1 Fixing Drive Unit 2 Bottle Drive Unit CBk 3 Bottle Drive Unit YM 4 Hopper Unit Y 5 Hopper Unit M 6 Hopper Unit C 7 Hopper Unit Bk 8 Cassette 1 Lifter Drive Unit 9 Cassette 1 Pickup Drive Unit 10 Main Drive Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 128 ...

Page 140: ...4201 ADF Registration Clutch FAN ADF Cooling Fan LED_DS Original Display LED LED_EXIT Delivery Display LED SR2 Delivery Tray Sensor SR5 ADF Cover Open Closed Sensor SR4204 Original Sensor SR4206 Paper Width Sensor REG Registration Sensor JUSO R Double Feed Detection PCB Reception JUSO T Double Feed Detection PCB Transmission 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 129 ...

Page 141: ... Reader Unit M4100 SR3 SR4 UN96 1 No Name M4100 Reader Motor SR3 CIS HP Sensor SR4 ADF Open Closed Sensor UN96 Wireless LAN PCB 1 Motion Sensor 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 130 ...

Page 142: ... Bk Drum_ITB Motor M03 Developing Motor M04 Fixing Motor M05 Cassette 1_Multi purpose Tray Pickup Motor M06 Pre registration Motor M07 Registration Motor M08 Reverse Motor M09 Bottle Motor YM M10 Bottle Motor CK M11 Cassette 1 Lifter Motor M12 Scanner Motor 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 131 ...

Page 143: ... Fan FM04 FM05 FM03 FM01 No Name FM01 Drum Unit Suction Cooling Fan error FM03 Delivery Cooling Fan FM04 Duplex Cooling Fan FM05 Power Supply Cooling Fan 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 132 ...

Page 144: ...2 CL03 CL04 No Name CL01 Developing Cylinder Clutch Y CL02 Developing Cylinder Clutch M CL03 Developing Cylinder Clutch C CL04 Developing Cylinder Clutch Bk Solenoid SL02 SL01 SL03 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 133 ...

Page 145: ...Shutter Solenoid Heater and Speaker TH01 TP01 TH03 H01 SP1 SP2 H02 TH02 No Name H01 Fixing Heater H02 Cassette Heater SP1 FAX Speaker SP2 Control Panel Speaker TH01 Main Thermistor TH02 Sub Thermistor Rear TH03 Sub Thermistor Front TP01 Fixing Thermoswitch 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 134 ...

Page 146: ...PS08 Bottle Rotation Sensor C PS09 Bottle Rotation Sensor Bk PS11 Arch Sensor PS12 Delivery Sensor PS13 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor UN17 Waste Toner Sensor PCB UN34 ATR Sensor Y UN35 ATR Sensor M UN36 ATR Sensor C UN37 ATR Sensor Bk UN38 Toner Log Connector Y UN39 Toner Log Connector M UN40 Toner Log Connector C UN41 Toner Log Connector Bk 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 135 ...

Page 147: ...or PS05 Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor PS10 Multi Purpose Tray HP Sensor PS14 Delivery Paper Full Sensor PS18 Cassette 1 Paper Surface Sensor PS20 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor UN31 Registration Patch Sensor Unit Front UN32 Registration Patch Sensor Unit Rear UN33 Environment Sensor Switch SW05 SW01 SW06 SW03 SW07 SW04 SW09 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 136 ...

Page 148: ...ch PCB UN08 UN09 UN10 UN11 UN15 UN14 UN13 UN12 UN05 UN83 UN93 No Name UN05 Y M C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN08 Drum Unit Relay PCB Y UN09 Drum Unit Relay PCB M UN10 Drum Unit Relay PCB C UN11 Drum Unit Relay PCB Bk UN12 Drum Unit Memory PCB Y UN13 Drum Unit Memory PCB M UN14 Drum Unit Memory PCB C UN15 Drum Unit Memory PCB Bk UN83 Control Panel CPU PCB UN93 Control Panel Numeric Keypad PCB 4 Parts Repl...

Page 149: ...CB UN02 Secondary Transfer High voltage PCB UN03 Primary Transfer High voltage PCB UN04 DC Controller PCB UN06 Developing High voltage PCB UN18 All night Power Supply PCB UN81 Main Controller PCB 1 Fax Communication Board 2 Fax Interface Board 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 138 ...

Page 150: ...ont Cover Procedure 1 Open the Front Cover 1 2 Remove the Front Cover Retainer Band 2 1 Boss 3 1 2 3 3 Pull out the cassette 1 4 Remove the Front Cover 2 while it is halfway open 1 Claw 3 2 Shafts 4 3 1 1x 4 2 4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 139 ...

Page 151: ...1 Procedure NOTE If the optional Copy Card Reader 1 is installed be sure to remove it first 1 1 Remove the Reader Rear Cover 2 NOTE When the Cassette Pedestal is not installed go to step 4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 140 ...

Page 152: ...2 In the case of the machine the without installed Cassette Heater Unit In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 141 ...

Page 153: ...3 In the case of the machine the without installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 142 ...

Page 154: ...4 Remove the Screws 5x 5 Remove the Rear Cover 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 143 ...

Page 155: ...n page 140 Procedure 1 Remove the Upper Left Cover 1 3 Screws 2 2 Hooks 3 3x 1 2 3 3 2 Removing the Left Lower Cover Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 Procedure 1 Pull out the Cassette 1 and open the Front Cover 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 144 ...

Page 156: ... Front Cover Pre check items NOTE The 4 claws 1 of the Right Front Cover are shown in the figure below 1 1 Procedure 1 Pull out the cassette 1 and open the Front Cover 2 2 Pull the Right Cover Open Close Lever 3 and open the Right Cover Unit 4 1 2 3 4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 145 ...

Page 157: ...2 4x 2 2 2 1 Removing the Right Rear Cover Right Rear Lower Cover Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 Procedure 1 Pull the Right Cover Open Close Lever 1 and open the Right Cover Unit 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 146 ...

Page 158: ...Cover Unit 3 3 3 1 2 3 Remove the Right Rear Cover 1 and the Right Rear Lower Cover 2 2 Screws 3 2 Hooks 4 2 Bosses 5 1 3 3 4 4 5 5 2x 2 Removing the Left Upper Cover Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 2 Removing the Right Rear Cover Right Rear Lower Cover on page 146 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 147 ...

Page 159: ... Pre check items NOTE The 9 claws 1 of the Right Upper Cover are shown in the figure below 1 1 1 1 Procedure 1 Open the ADF Unit Reader Unit 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 148 ...

Page 160: ... Unit Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 2 Removing the Right Rear Cover Right Rear Lower Cover on page 146 Procedure CAUTION Be sure not to touch the roller surface A of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit when disassembling assembling A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 149 ...

Page 161: ...embling assembling 1 Do not place the Right Cover Unit 2 directly on the floor after removing the Multi purpose tray 1 This is because the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller Multi purpose Tray Feed Roller Unit 3 may be damaged 1 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 150 ...

Page 162: ...1 Disconnect the Connector 1 1x 1 CAUTION Be sure to disassemble assemble by holding the Right Cover Unit 1 after step 2 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 151 ...

Page 163: ...r Stopper Rear Holder When assembling be sure to align the hook 1 and the boss 2 and align the shaft 3 of the Right Cover Stopper Rear with the groove A of the Right Cover Unit and the groove B of the Right Cover Stopper Rear Holder to install the holder 1 2 3 A B 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 152 ...

Page 164: ...ssembling align the hook 1 and the boss 2 and align the shaft 3 of the Right Cover Stopper Front with the groove A of the Right Cover Unit and the groove B of the Right Cover Stopper Front Holder 1 2 3 A B 4 Remove the Right Cover Rear Support Holder 1 1 Screw 2 1 Boss 3 2 Hooks 4 1x 1 2 3 4 4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 153 ...

Page 165: ...he Secondary Transfer Roller 3 1 2 3 2 3 If the foregoing work is omitted a power on jam may occur due to the Secondary Transfer Roller being disengaged when the power is turned ON This occurs because the Sensor Flag moves when the roller is disengaged and it is wrongly detected as a jam The machine recovers by opening and then closing the door 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 154 ...

Page 166: ...N Be careful not to drop the Multi purpose Tray Shaft Holder 2 in the host machine when disassembling assembling 1 1 Open the Multi purpose Tray Lower Cover 1 and release the Multi purpose Tray Shaft Holder 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 155 ...

Page 167: ...Shaft Holder 2 2 Shafts 3 3 2 1 3 Removing the Delivery Tray Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 2 Removing the Left Upper Cover on page 144 Procedure 1 Open the ADF Unit Reader Unit 1 and the Front Cover 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 156 ...

Page 168: ... 3 1 Hook 4 4 Bosses 5 2 1 1 5 5 4 2x 3 5 Removing the Rear Upper Cover Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 Procedure 1 Open the ADF Unit Reader Unit 1 and remove the ADF Arm Cover 2 1 Screw 3 2 Hooks 4 1 2 3 4 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 157 ...

Page 169: ... 2 while pressing the ADF Unit Reader Unit 1 CAUTION Be careful not to drop the ADF Unit Reader Unit 1 when disassembling assembling 1 1 2 3 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 1 2 Bosses 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 158 ...

Page 170: ...moving the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 2 Removing the Right Rear Cover Right Rear Lower Cover on page 146 3 Removing the Left Upper Cover on page 147 4 Removing the Control Panel Unit on page 161 5 Removing the Rear Upper Cover on page 157 Procedure 1 Open the Front Cover 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 159 ...

Page 171: ...nit Reader Unit 1 1 Screw 3 1 Boss 4 1 Hook 5 CAUTION Be careful not to drop the ADF Unit Reader Unit 1 when disassembling assembling 1 2 3 5 1x 4 1 3 Place the ADF Unit Reader Unit 1 on the ADF Arm 2 temporarily 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 160 ...

Page 172: ...n the ADF Unit 1 Control Panel Unit 2 1 2 2 Remove the Control Panel Rear Hinge Cover 1 2 Bosses 2 1 Claw 3 2 1 2 3 1x 3 Orient the Control Panel Unit 1 upward and place a sheet of paper 2 on the Reader Unit 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 161 ...

Page 173: ...rform work so as not to damage the Control Panel since the Control Panel Unit has been removed and the remainder of the work must be performed in an unstable state after step 2 1 2 4x 2 2 3 5 Pull out the Control Panel Cable 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 162 ...

Page 174: ... the Control Panel 1 Wire Saddle 2 1x 2 1 7 Remove the Control Panel Tilt Cover 1 2 Bosses 2 1 2 8 Move the Slide Unit 1 to the center and install the screw 2 removed in step 4 1 Claw 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 163 ...

Page 175: ...e the Cable Guide 1 1 Boss 2 1 Hook 3 1 2 3 11 Remove the Control Panel Unit NOTE When removing the Touch Panel Control Panel CPU PCB Unit or LCD Unit be sure not to remove the screw installed in step 8 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 164 ...

Page 176: ...ssemble the Control Panel Unit Insert the protrusion A of the Control Panel Upper Hinge Cover 1 into the lower side of the edge B of the Upper Cover to install the Control Panel Unit 2 4 Hooks 3 4 Screws 4 2 4 4x 4 4 3 3 A B 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 165 ...

Page 177: ...CAUTION Be sure to check the tilting operation Be sure to check the sliding operation Be sure to reassemble it if it does not operate 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 166 ...

Page 178: ...e Feed System Removing the ADF Unit Procedure CAUTION Be careful not to damage the white sheets 1 and 2 of the ADF Unit when disassembling assembling 1 2 1 Open the Feeder Cover 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 167 ...

Page 179: ...2 Remove the Original Tray 1 2 Shafts 2 1 2 2 3 Remove the Reader Rear Cover 2 1 2 Claws 2 3 Hooks 3 2x 1 2 3 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 168 ...

Page 180: ...4 Remove the Rear Cover 1 1 5 Screws 2 1 2 2 5x 5 Remove the Main Controller Sub Cover 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 169 ...

Page 181: ...sen CAUTION The Main Controller Cover has an HDD 1 on the back side The HDD 1 is sensitive to shock When handling this cover be sure not to give a shock to it 1 2x 1 4 3 2 1x 1x 7 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 1 2 Screws 2 2 Bosses 3 2x 1 2 3 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 170 ...

Page 182: ... to the Main Controller Unit 1 4 Connectors 2 1 USB Connector 3 1 Flat Cable 4 4 1 2 3 6x 9 Free the Flat Cable 1 from the guide A 1 A 1x 10 Free the harness 1 1 Edge Saddle 2 1 Harness Guide A 1 2 A 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 171 ...

Page 183: ...e 2 harness 3 USB Cable 4 and Flat Cable 5 1 Sheet 6 1 Harness Guide A 1 Wire Saddle 7 1 Harness Guide B 5 B 3 4 2 1 A 6 7 1x 4x 12 Close the Feeder Cover 1 1 13 Remove the ADF Unit 1 while removing the Harness Cover 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 172 ...

Page 184: ...ure to insert the rib A of the Harness Cover into the guide B of the Reader Unit B A Removing the ADF Pickup Unit Procedure CAUTION Be sure not to touch the surface A of the roller when disassembling assembling A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 173 ...

Page 185: ...ADF Pickup Unit 2 while pressing the lever 1 1 Claw 3 1 Shaft 4 1x 2 3 1 4 Removing the ADF Separation Unit Procedure CAUTION Be sure not to touch the surface A of the roller when disassembling assembling A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 174 ...

Page 186: ... 1 1 Claw 2 1 Shaft 3 1x 1 3 2 Removing the Scanner Unit Back Procedure CAUTION Be careful not to touch the A part of the sensor of the Scanner Unit Back when disassembling assembling Be sure to hold the side surface B B B A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 175 ...

Page 187: ...1 Open the Feeder Cover 1 1 2 Remove the Original Tray 1 2 Shafts 2 1 2 2 3 Remove the ADF Rear Cover 1 2 Screws 2 2 Bosses 3 2 Hooks 4 1 4 2 2x 3 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 176 ...

Page 188: ...ful not to trap the harness 2 with the ADF Rear Cover 1 Close the Harness Connection Cover 3 first and then install the ADF Rear Cover 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 3 4 Remove the Link Arm 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 177 ...

Page 189: ...1 Connector 4 4 Screws 5 2 Bosses 6 4 2 3 6 6 5 5 1x 4x 1x 1x A 1 6 Remove the Lead 1 Sensor Unit 1 1 Screw 2 1 Boss 3 1 Hook 4 1 Flag 5 5 A 4 1x 3 2 1 NOTE When installing the Lead 1 Sensor Unit 1 pass the shaft A under the flag 5 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 178 ...

Page 190: ...7 Remove the harness 1 1 Reuse Band 2 1 Connector 3 2 1 A 3 2x 1x 8 Remove the CIS Cover 1 3 Screws 2 2 3x 1 9 Disconnect the Flat Cable 1 1 Flat Cable 1 1x 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 179 ...

Page 191: ...es CAUTION Be careful not to touch the A part of the sensor of the Scanner Unit Back when disassembling assembling Be sure to hold the side surface B B B A 1 Boss 2 2 1 11 Remove the Scanner Unit Back 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 180 ...

Page 192: ...mixed or lost be sure to check the Scanner Unit Back Rank Label 3 being used and use the Spacers appropriate for the rank of the Scanner Unit Back There are three ranks available for the Scanner Unit Back and there are spacers suitable for each rank Rank Color of spacer Height of spacer A Gray 3 17 mm B Titanium white 3 27 mm C Standard black 3 37 mm A B C CAUTION After Replacing the Scanner Unit ...

Page 193: ... Unit Procedure CAUTION When removing the Copyboard Glass be careful not to touch the 2 glass surfaces A If the surface becomes dirty clean it with the Glass Cleaning Sheet A 1 Open the ADF 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 182 ...

Page 194: ...1x 4 3 3 Remove the Copyboard Glass Unit 1 4 Screws 2 2 Bosses 3 4x 1 2 2 3 3 CAUTION After Replacing the Copyboard Glass on page 310 Removing the Scanner Unit Front Preparation 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass Unit on page 182 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 183 ...

Page 195: ... Be careful not to touch the A part of the sensor of the Scanner Unit Front when disassembling assembling A 1 Move the Scanner Unit Front 1 to the center 1 2 Remove the 2 spacers 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 184 ...

Page 196: ...et of paper 2 to prevent the rail 1 from being damaged 1 2 4 Place the Scanner Unit Front 1 on the paper 2 Shafts 2 1 2 2 5 Remove the Scanner Unit Front 1 1 Flat Cable 2 1x 2 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 185 ...

Page 197: ...eading error may occur 1 2 3 2 If the CIS Spacers are mixed or lost be sure to check the CIS Rank Label 3 being used and use the CIS Spacers appropriate for the rank of the Scanner Unit Front There are three ranks available for the Scanner Unit Front and there are spacers suitable for each rank Rank Color of spacer Height of spacer A Gray 1 13 mm B White 1 23 mm C Brown 1 33 mm A B C 4 Parts Repla...

Page 198: ...hooked on the belt 2 when assembling 1 2 CAUTION After Replacing the Scanner Unit Front on page 310 Removing the Reader Motor Procedure 1 Open the ADF Unit Reader Unit 1 1 2 Remove the Reader Motor Cover 1 2 Screws 2 2x 1 2 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 187 ...

Page 199: ...3 Remove the Reader Motor 1 1 Connector 2 1 Wire Saddle 3 2 Screws 4 2x 1x 1x 2 3 1 4 4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 188 ...

Page 200: ...troller System Removing the Main Controller Unit Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 Procedure 1 Remove the Main Controller Sub Cover 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 189 ...

Page 201: ...an HDD 1 on the back side The HDD 1 is sensitive to shock When handling this cover be sure not to give a shock to it 1 2x 1 4 3 2 1x 1x 3 When the optional Fax Unit 1 is installed disconnect the 2 connectors 3 and free the cable from the Edge Saddle 2 Harness Guide A 1x 2x 3 1 A 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 190 ...

Page 202: ...onnected to the Main Controller Unit 1 9 Connectors 2 4 USB Connector 3 1 Control Panel Communication Connector 4 3 Flat Cables 5 5 1 5 2 2 4 3 17x 6 Pull out the removed harness from hole A of the Main Controller Unit 1 and the Flat Cable Guide B 3 USB Cables 1 3 Flat Cables 2 2 3x 1 A B 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 191 ...

Page 203: ...7 Remove the 2 harnesses 1 Harness Guide A 7 Reuse Bands 2 1 Edge Saddle 3 2 Wire Saddles 4 2 3 A 5x 1 6x 1 2 2 4 4 8 Remove the Rear Cover 2 1 3 Hooks 2 1 2 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 192 ...

Page 204: ...9 Remove the Main Controller Unit 1 4 Screws 2 3 Hooks 3 4x 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 NOTE The completed assembly of the Main Controller Unit is shown below 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 193 ...

Page 205: ... old PCB to a new PCB 1 TPM PCB 2 FLASH PCB 3 Memorey PCB 3 1 2 Removing the DC Controller PCB Preparation CAUTION Before Parts Replacement on page 307 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 2 Removing the Main Controller Unit on page 189 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 194 ...

Page 206: ...he DC Controller PCB 1 28 Connectors 2 28x 1 2 2 Remove the DC Controller PCB 1 5 Screws 2 5x 2 2 1 NOTE The completed assembly of the DC Controller PCB is shown below CAUTION Works During Parts Replacement on page 307 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 195 ...

Page 207: ...he All night Power Supply PCB Unit on page 200 Procedure 1 Remove the 5 connectors 1 and the 2 round shape terminals 2 2 Screws 3 2x 5x 1 1 2 3 2 Free the harness 1 from the Harness Guide A and B 2x 1 1 A B 3 Remove the Secondary Transfer High voltage PCB Developing High voltage PCB Unit 1 2 Screws 2 2x 2 2 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 196 ...

Page 208: ...mbly Execute Auto Adjust Gradation Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Removing the Primary Transfer High voltage PCB Unit Preparation 1 Pull out the ITB Unit for about 10 cm If your hand or the PCB comes in contact with the ITB Cleaning Unit when removing the Primary Transfer High voltage PCB Unit in step 6 the ITB may be damaged 2 R...

Page 209: ...n 1 1 Connector 2 1 Claw 3 2 Hooks 4 1x 1x 1 2 3 4 4 2 Remove the round shape terminal 1 1 Screw 2 Harness Guide A 3 Disconnect the 3 connectors 3 and free the harness 4 from the Harness Guide B 1x 3x 1 2 3 3 4 A B 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 198 ...

Page 210: ... Toner Container is located behind the Primary Transfer High voltage PCB Unit 2 1 2 1 When assembling the contact point A of the Primary Transfer High voltage PCB Unit must be contacted with the 4 Contact Springs B of the High voltage Main Guide A B Actions after assembly Execute Auto Adjust Gradation Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adju...

Page 211: ...pply PCB Unit Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 Procedure 1 Remove the Rear Cover 2 1 3 Hooks 2 1 2 2 2 Remove the All night Power Supply Cover 1 2 Screws 2 2 Hooks 3 2x 1 2 3 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 200 ...

Page 212: ...ation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 2 Removing the Main Controller Unit on page 189 3 Removing the All night Power Supply PCB Unit on page 200 Procedure 1 Disconnect the 7 connectors 2 connected to the Low voltage Power Supply PCB 1 2 Free the harness 3 from the Harness Guide A of the Fan Guide 1 2 2x 2 5x 1x 3 A 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 201 ...

Page 213: ...3 Remove the Fan Guide 1 1 Screw 2 1 Boss 3 3 Hooks 4 1 1x 2 3 4 4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 202 ...

Page 214: ...s 3 6 Hooks 4 1 Connector 5 5 1x 1 4 3 3 4 4 4 2 1x NOTE How to install the Power Switch Harness Guide Be sure to align the groove A of the Power Switch Harness Guide with the end B of the cover to install the guide B B A A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 203 ...

Page 215: ...5 Remove the Fixing Harness Guide 1 1 Boss 2 2 Hooks 3 1 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 204 ...

Page 216: ...l the Power Supply Harness Guide Be sure to align the 2 grooves A of the Power Supply Harness Guide with the edge B of the side plate and hook the hook 1 in the hole 2 on the side plate of the Low voltage Power Supply PCB to install the guide 1 1 A A 2 B 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 205 ...

Page 217: ...oving the Touch Panel Control Panel CPU PCB Unit LCD Unit Preparation 1 Removing the Control Panel Unit on page 161 Procedure CAUTION Do not touch the surface A of the Touch Panel and the surface B of the LCD Unit when disassembling assembling B A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 206 ...

Page 218: ...1 Remove the Control Panel Slide Cover 1 2 Screw 2 3 Hooks 3 2x 1 3 2 2 2 Remove the Control Panel Rear Cover 1 6 Screws 2 6x 1 2 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 207 ...

Page 219: ...ide Unit 1 4 Screws 2 CAUTION Do not remove the screw 1 tightened temporarily Otherwise the slide part A may move and damage the harness 2 when removing the Control Panel Slide Unit 1 2 A 4x 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 208 ...

Page 220: ...e are differences in the screw 2 on the Control Panel Stay Unit Plate 1 depending on the production lot Screw installation position Screw type 1 2 1 2 2 2 3 Connectors 2 2 Wire Saddles 3 2 Screws 4 2x 2x 1 2 4 3 2 3x 4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 209 ...

Page 221: ...e wrap A of the harness 1 close to the Wire Saddle 5 Be sure that the harness 1 does not interfere with the screw head 4 If the harness 1 interferes with the screw head 4 the Slide Unit interferes with the harness 1 resulting in damage of the harness 1 A 5 4 3 3 2 2 4 A 5 5 Remove the Control Panel CPU PCB Unit 1 2 Flexible Cables 2 1 Connector 3 6 Screws 4 6x 3x 1 2 2 4 4 3 4 4 Parts Replacement ...

Page 222: ...part and remove the Control Panel Stay Unit 2 8 Screws 3 8x 2 3 1 3 3 A 7 Remove the Numeric Keypad PCB 1 3 Wire Saddles 2 Guide A 1 Screw 3 1x 4x 1 2 A 2 3 8 Remove the LCD Holder 1 3 Screws 2 3x 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 211 ...

Page 223: ...the Touch Panel 1 3 Claws 2 3x 1 2 2 Removing the HDD Preparation CAUTION Before Replacing on page 308 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 Procedure 1 Remove the Main Controller Sub Cover 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 212 ...

Page 224: ...troller Cover has an HDD 1 on the back side The HDD 1 is sensitive to shock When handling this cover be sure not to give a shock to it 1 2x 1 4 3 2 1x 1x 3 Remove the HDD 1 4 Screws 3 2 Connectors 2 1 2 2 3 4x 2x 3 CAUTION Actions after Parts Replacement on page 309 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 213 ...

Page 225: ...the FAX Speaker Unit 1 1 Connector 2 1 Wire Saddle 3 2 Screws 4 2x 1x 1x 1 2 3 4 Removing the Fax Unit Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 2 Removing the Left Upper Cover on page 144 3 Removing the Fax Speaker Unit on page 214 Procedure 1 Remove the Main Controller Sub Cover 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 214 ...

Page 226: ... The Main Controller Cover has an HDD 1 on the back side The HDD 1 is sensitive to shock When handling this cover be sure not to give a shock to it 1 2x 1 4 3 2 1x 1x 3 Remove the Fax Unit 1 2 Connectors 2 Harness Guide A 2 Screws 3 1x 2x 2x 2 A 3 3 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 215 ...

Page 227: ...Drum Unit Y M C Bk on page 222 4 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 5 Removing the Left Lower Cover on page 144 6 Removing the Primary Transfer High voltage PCB Unit on page 197 Procedure CAUTION Be sure not to disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit because adjustment is required Disassembling the unit may cause functional problems Do not touch the toner outlet A because the toner may be scattered ...

Page 228: ...nner Fixation Spring 1 1 Hook 2 1 2 3 Pull out the Laser Scanner 1 1 Edge Saddle 2 CAUTION Do not touch the PCB installed on the Laser Scanner Unit when disassembling assembling 1 1 2 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 217 ...

Page 229: ...4 Free the Flat Cable 1 from the Wire Saddle 2 and disconnect the 2 connectors 3 1x 3x 1 2 3 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 218 ...

Page 230: ...3 protrusions B of the Laser Scanner Unit into the 3 holes A of the plate 2 Slightly pull the Laser Scanner Unit 1 toward the front and fit the boss 2 into the hole C of the plate to install the unit A B B B 1 1 2 C 3 Check that the contact area A of the Laser Scanner Unit is in contact with the plate A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 219 ...

Page 231: ... assembly Execute Auto Adjust Gradation and Auto Correct Color Mismatch Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 220 ...

Page 232: ... be sure to keep the Waste Toner Container in a horizontal position when removing the container 1 2 1 Open the Front Cover 1 and remove the Waste Toner Container 2 1 2 Removing the Toner Container Y M C Bk Procedure NOTE In this procedure the procedure for the Bk color Toner Container Unit is described Be sure to perform the same procedure for Y M C color 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 221 ...

Page 233: ...or the Bk color Drum Unit is described Be sure to perform the same procedure for Y M C color CAUTION Touching the drum part A of the Drum Unit may cause finger oil to be attached on the drum This makes the finger oil on the drum to be attached to toner causing the risk of soiled image For this reason be careful not to touch the drum part A when handling the Drum Unit A 4 Parts Replacement and Clea...

Page 234: ...Unit to light for a long time may cause deterioration in sensitivity Therefore be sure to block light to the drum part A using paper 1 when removing the Drum Unit from the host machine 1 A A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 223 ...

Page 235: ...e Developing Assembly in the unit As a result starter in the Developing Assembly does not circulate and image failure may occur When replacing the Drum Unit to a new one be sure to loosen starter in the Developing Assembly by shaking the unit approx 10 to 12 times as shown in the figure below before installing it to the host machine 10 12 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 224 ...

Page 236: ...g the Drum Unit 1 to the host machine be sure to install the Drum Unit 1 properly by inserting it until it stops 1 2 3 Actions after assembly Execute Auto Adjust Gradation Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Removing the ITB Unit Procedure NOTE If the duration level of the ITB Unit and that of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit ...

Page 237: ...on a level space so as not to damage the ITB 2 1 2 CAUTION Do not damage the ITB 1 when disassembling assembling When removing the ITB Unit do not hold the 2 Push Levers 1 to hold the unit 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 226 ...

Page 238: ... Be sure to store the ITB Unit in the machine after checking that the outlet A is closed when assembling There is a risk of damaging the ITB Unit if it is installed with the Transfer Cleaning Shutter 1 open 1 1 A 1 Pull the Right Cover Open Close Lever 1 and open the Right Cover Unit 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 227 ...

Page 239: ...3 1 2 3 3 Hold the 2 Push Levers 1 and pull out the ITB Unit 3 to the position where the 2 handles 2 are lifted 1 2 2 3 4 Now hold the 2 handles 1 and remove the ITB Unit 2 1 1 2 5 Cleaning when installing removing the ITB Unit on page 297 6 Cleaning the Registration Patch Sensor Unit on page 298 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 228 ...

Page 240: ...with the 2 grooves A of the rails of the ITB Unit and then put the unit inside the machine A B A B 1 1 2 2 Push the 2 Push Levers 2 of the ITB Unit 1 to install the ITB Unit CAUTION When installing the ITB Unit do not push it in the machine by pushing the ITB 1 1 2 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 229 ...

Page 241: ... Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch Removing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Preparation 1 Removing the Waste Toner Container on page 221 2 Remove the Drum Unit Bk Removing the Drum Unit Y M C Bk on page 222 3 Removing the ITB Unit on page 225 Procedure CAUTION Do not disassemble the Registration Patch Sensor Unit because it requires adjustment Do not to fold the Plastic Film Sheet 1 whe...

Page 242: ...w 2 4 Shafts 3 1 Connector 4 Harness Guide A 1x 1x 1x 1 3 3 2 4 A Installation 1 When assembling be sure to hook the protrusion A of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit over the 2 springs 1 to install the unit 1 A 1 A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 231 ...

Page 243: ...Full Adjust Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit Procedure NOTE If the duration level of the ITB Unit and that of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit are not equal a color displacement may occur in the output image CAUTION Be sure not to touch the surface A of the roller when disassembli...

Page 244: ...ses 2 1 2 2 A A Actions after assembly Execute Auto Adjust Gradation Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Guide Unit Procedure CAUTION Be sure not to touch the surface A of the roller when disassembling assembling A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 233 ...

Page 245: ...ht Cover Unit 2 1 2 2 Release the lock of the Right Cover Stopper Front 1 and the Right Cover Stopper Rear 2 and then further open the Right Cover Unit 3 1 2 3 3 Remove the Right Cover Stopper Rear Holder 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 234 ...

Page 246: ...1 3 Claws 2 CAUTION Be sure to perform work carefully so as not to damage the gear 1 when disassembling assembling 1 3x 1 2 2 5 Remove the Lock Guide Rear 1 1 Claw 2 1 Boss 3 2 Hook 4 1x 1 2 3 4 4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 235 ...

Page 247: ...7 Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Guide Unit 1 1 Installation 1 Check that the harness 1 is stored in the guide A of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Guide Unit When it is not stored paper skew may occur Related jam code 00 0105 00 0107 1 A 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 236 ...

Page 248: ... D of the Lock Guide and the spring 1 to install the unit Align the groove E of the Lock Guide with the protrusion F of the Right Cover Unit to lock the claw 2 1x 2 F E C A 1 D B Installing the Duplexing Drive Gear Unit 1 Attach the 2 small gears 2 to the gear 1 2 Place the gear 3 on the top 3 Attach the Planetary Gear 4 to the bottom 1 2 3 4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 237 ...

Page 249: ... the Right Cover Unit check that the gear 3 rotates in the direction of the arrow when the gear 2 is rotated in the direction of the arrow 1 2 3 Removing the Registration Drive Unit Preparation 1 Removing the Front Cover on page 139 2 Removing the Right Front Cover on page 145 3 Removing the Waste Toner Container on page 221 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 238 ...

Page 250: ...ok 5 2x 4x 1 2 4 4 5 2 3 CAUTION Do not install the Front Inner Lower Cover with the lens 1 of the Waste Toner Sensor PCB removed Do not touch the surface A of the lens 1 1 A 2 Remove the Registration Drive Unit 1 1 Connector 2 2 Screws 3 1 2 2x 1x 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 239 ...

Page 251: ...g the Left Upper Cover on page 144 3 Removing the Fax Speaker Unit on page 214 4 Removing the Fax Unit on page 214 5 Removing the Main Controller Unit on page 189 6 Removing the Low voltage Power Supply Unit on page 201 7 Removing the DC Controller PCB on page 194 Procedure 1 Pull the Right Cover Open Close Lever 1 and open the Right Cover Unit 2 1 2 2 Remove the Main Drive Unit 1 6 Screws 2 6x 1 ...

Page 252: ... Unit 1 If there is a gap make sure to align one of 3 protrusions of the cam 2 on machine s side to the top position and then assemble it 1 1 A A B B 2 2 2 Check that there is no gap and then secure using 6 screws in the order indicated by the illustration below 6x Actions after assembly Execute Auto Correct Color Mismatch Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Corr...

Page 253: ...Toner Container on page 221 10 Remove the toner container The color to be removed Removing the Toner Container Y M C Bk on page 221 11 Remove the Drum Unit The color to be removed Removing the Drum Unit Y M C Bk on page 222 12 Removing the ITB Unit on page 225 13 Removing the Left Lower Cover on page 144 14 Removing the Primary Transfer High voltage PCB Unit on page 197 15 Free the harness 1 from ...

Page 254: ...3 2 2 4 5 5 4 2x Procedure NOTE In this procedure the procedures for the Hopper Unit Bk are described Perform the same procedure for removing the Hopper Unit Y M C CAUTION Perform work carefully so as not to scatter the toner when disassembling assembling 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 243 ...

Page 255: ...stment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch Removing the ITB Pressure Release Switch Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 2 Removing the Left Upper Cover on page 144 3 Removing the Fax Speaker Unit on page 214 4 Removing the Fax Unit on page 214 5 Removing the Main Controller Unit on page 189 6 Removing the Low voltage Power Supply Unit on page 201 7 Removing...

Page 256: ...ion 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 2 Removing the Left Upper Cover on page 144 3 Removing the Fax Speaker Unit on page 214 4 Removing the Fax Unit on page 214 5 Removing the Main Controller Unit on page 189 6 Removing the Low voltage Power Supply Unit on page 201 7 Removing the DC Controller PCB on page 194 8 Removing the Delivery Tray on page 156 9 Remove the toner container color to be ...

Page 257: ...1 Free the Harness 1 Harness Guide A 1x 1 A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 246 ...

Page 258: ... hole A of the gear with the protrusion B of the shaft to install the unit A B Removing the Toner Bottle Mount Y M C Bk Preparation for the Toner Bottle Mount Y M C 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 2 Removing the Left Upper Cover on page 144 3 Removing the Fax Speaker Unit on page 214 4 Removing the Fax Unit on page 214 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 247 ...

Page 259: ...ner Container Y M C Bk on page 221 11 Removing the Drum Unit Y M C Bk on page 222 12 Removing the ITB Unit on page 225 13 Removing the Left Lower Cover on page 144 14 Removing the Primary Transfer High voltage PCB Unit on page 197 15 Free the harness 1 from the Harness Guide A of the High voltage Contact Unit 1x 1 A 16 Remove the High voltage Contact Unit 1 2 Connector 2 1 Boss 3 2 Hooks 4 2 Claws...

Page 260: ...g the Main Drive Unit on page 240 9 Removing the Waste Toner Container on page 221 10 Removing the Toner Container Y M C Bk on page 221 11 Removing the Drum Unit Y M C Bk on page 222 12 Removing the ITB Unit on page 225 13 Removing the Left Lower Cover on page 144 14 Removing the Primary Transfer High voltage PCB Unit on page 197 15 Remove the Hopper Unit Bk Removing the Hopper Unit Y M C Bk on pa...

Page 261: ...l Unit 1 to move the Upper Cover 2 1 Screw 3 1 2 3 1x 23 Remove the Delivery Guide 1 1 Screw 2 1 Hook 3 1 Boss 4 1 2 3 1x 4 24 Remove the Delivery Tray Air Duct 1 2 Bosses 2 2 Hooks 3 1 3 2 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 250 ...

Page 262: ...he screw 1 of the Toner Bottle Mount C This is because it may be hooked when removing the Toner Bottle Mount Bk 1 1x Procedure NOTE In this procedure the procedure for the Toner Bottle Mount Bk is described Perform the same procedure for removing the Toner Bottle Mount Y M C a 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 251 ...

Page 263: ...1 Remove the tag 1 Harness Guide A 2 Claws 2 2x 2 1 A 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the Harness Guide A and the screw 2 1x 1x 1x 1 2 A A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 252 ...

Page 264: ...er assembly Execute Auto Adjust Gradation and Auto Correct Color Mismatch Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 253 ...

Page 265: ...rt removing the Fixing Assembly after it is cooled down enough The Fixing Assembly may cause burn injuries due to the high temperature immediately after printing 1 Pull the Right Cover Open Close Lever 1 and open the Right Cover Unit 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 254 ...

Page 266: ...Fixing Assembly Be sure to push the Release Lever A of the Fixing Assembly with your finger until it locks A A Removing the Fixing Film Unit Pressure Roller Unit Preparation 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly on page 254 Procedure 1 Remove the Fixing Assembly Cover 1 2 Screws 2 2x 2 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 255 ...

Page 267: ...ks 3 1 1 2 2 3 3 NOTE Procedure when installing the Pressure Springs 2 In order to facilitate installation of the Pressure Spring rotate the gear to have the cam facing down put a screwdriver 1 between the Fixing Pressure Plate Front Rear and the Side Plate and hold down the Fixing Plate while installing the Pressure Spring 1 2 A 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 256 ...

Page 268: ...onnect the connector while paying attention not to have the flag of the gear come in contact with the sensor 1 2 1x 5 Remove the gear 1 1 Claw 2 CAUTION Do not damage the claw 2 when removing the gear 1 1 2 1x 6 Remove the Fixing Film Unit 1 2 Connectors 2 1 2 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 257 ...

Page 269: ...7 Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide 1 1 Claw 2 5 Hooks 3 1 2 3 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 258 ...

Page 270: ...arts of the Fixing Assembly If felt is already affixed remove the old felt clean the portion with lint free paper moistened with alcohol and affix new felt 1 1 A A Removing the Fixing Drive Unit Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 2 Removing the Main Controller Unit on page 189 3 Removing the Low voltage Power Supply Unit on page 201 4 Removing the Fixing Assembly on page 254 4 Par...

Page 271: ...screws 4 all of which are of the Fixing Drive Unit 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 4 3x 2x 1x 2 Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 2 while disconnecting the inner connector 1 1x 1 2 Actions after assembly Execute Auto Correct Color Mismatch Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 260 ...

Page 272: ...edure 1 Pull the Right Cover Open Close Lever 1 and open the Right Cover Unit 2 1 2 2 Release the lock of the Right Cover Stopper Front 1 and the Right Cover Stopper Rear 2 and then further open the Right Cover Unit 3 1 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 261 ...

Page 273: ...ngs Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller Cassette Separation Roller Cassette Feed Roller Procedure NOTE The layout for the Cassette Pickup Roller 1 Separation Roller 2 Feed Roller 3 is shown below 1 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 262 ...

Page 274: ...ng assembling A A A 1 Pull the Right Cover Open Close Lever 1 and open the Right Cover Unit 2 1 2 2 Release the lock of the Right Cover Stopper Front 1 and the Right Cover Stopper Rear 2 and then further open the Right Cover Unit 3 1 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 263 ...

Page 275: ...3 Remove the Cassette 1 1 When removing the Cassette Pickup Roller 1 Move the Pickup Guide Holder 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 264 ...

Page 276: ...tte Pickup Roller Be sure to align the groove A of the Cassette Pickup Roller 1 with the protrusion B of the gear to install the roller Be sure to hook the claw 2 1 A B 1x 2 When removing the Cassette Feed Roller 1 Move the Pickup Guide Holder 1 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 265 ...

Page 277: ...1 2 1x NOTE How to install the Cassette Feed Roller Be sure to align the groove A of the Cassette Feed Roller 1 with the protrusion B of the coupling to install the roller Be sure to hook the claw 2 1 2 A B 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 266 ...

Page 278: ...e to hook the claw 2 1 A B 2 1x Actions after assembly Execute Auto Correct Color Mismatch Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch Removing the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Multi purpose Tray Feed Roller Preparation 1 Removing the Multi purpose Tray on page 155 When the Multi purpose Tray is removed it b...

Page 279: ...oller 2 Feed Roller 3 is shown below 1 2 3 CAUTION Be sure not to touch the surface A of the roller when disassembling assembling A A A Disassembling Procedure 1 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Roller Holder 1 1 1 Boss 2 2 Hooks 3 1 2 3 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 268 ...

Page 280: ... 2 3 When removing the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller 3 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller 1 1 When removing the Multi purpose Tray Feed Roller 4 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Feed Roller 2 while pressing the Torque Limiter 1 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 269 ...

Page 281: ...i purpose Tray Separation Roller 1 2 Claws 3 2x 1 2 3 3 6 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller 1 1 Claw 2 1 2 1x Assembling Procedure 1 Align the groove A of the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller 1 with the protrusion B of the Torque Limiter to install 1 Claw 2 1 A B 1x 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 270 ...

Page 282: ... remove its shaft 1 1 2 3 Install the Multi purpose Tray Feed Guide 1 2 Claws 2 1x 1x 1 2 2 4 Align the groove A of the Multi purpose Tray Feed Roller 2 with the protrusion B of the coupling while pressing the Torque Limiter 1 to install 1 A B 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 271 ...

Page 283: ...sion B of the coupling to install 1 A B 6 Install the Multi purpose Tray Roller Holder 2 1 2 Shaft Holes 2 1 Hook 3 1 2 2 3 1 3 7 Align the Multi purpose Tray Roller Holder 1 1 to the corner A for installation 1 Boss 2 2 Hooks 3 2 1 2 3 3 A 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 272 ...

Page 284: ...ing when the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft is detached NOTE The following describes the state in which the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft is detached 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 273 ...

Page 285: ...ure 1 Hook the 2 shafts 2 on the 2 hooks 1 CAUTION When assembling the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft 3 pay attention to the direction of installing it 3 1 2 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 274 ...

Page 286: ...tion Roller Shaft 1 to assemble them 1 A A B 2 Reassembling when the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft is detached and dropped inside the host machine NOTE The following describes the state in which the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft is detached and dropped inside the host machine Preparation 1 Removing the Right Inner Cover Unit on page 261 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 27...

Page 287: ...er 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 2 Lift the Right Cover Stopper Rear 1 and remove the Sensor Harness 2 1 Connector 3 Harness Guide A 1x 1x 1 2 3 A 3 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Separation Unit 1 3 Screws 2 2 Bosses 3 3x 2 1 3 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 276 ...

Page 288: ...5 Assemble the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft 2 on the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Holder 1 CAUTION When assembling the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft 2 pay attention to the direction of installing it 2 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 277 ...

Page 289: ...Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft 1 CAUTION Be sure to align the groove A of the Torque Limiter 2 with the protrusion B of the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Shaft 1 to assemble 1 2 A B 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 278 ...

Page 290: ...Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch Removing the Registration Pickup Unit Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 2 Removing the Right Rear Cover Right Rear Lower Cover on page 146 3 Removing the Right Cover Unit on page 149 4 Removing the Front Cover on page 139 5 Removing the Right Front Cover on page 145 6 Removing the Waste Toner Con...

Page 291: ...assembling A A A CAUTION If the Registration Roller 2 and the Pre registration Roller 1 are replaced separately not simultaneously it may generate a difference in feeding speed and cause feeding problems such as geometrical characteristics and jams 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 280 ...

Page 292: ...1 Remove the Right Cover Stopper Front 1 and the Right Cover Stopper Rear 2 2 Hooks 3 2 Shafts 4 1 2 3 4 2 Remove the Swing Guide 1 2 Shafts 2 1 2 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 281 ...

Page 293: ...ickup Unit 1 5 Screws 2 2 Bosses 3 CAUTION Be careful not to drop the shaft 1 when disassembling assembling 1 5x 2 2 3 3 1 Actions after assembly Execute Auto Correct Color Mismatch Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 282 ...

Page 294: ...the front side Image with uneven density white spots on the rear side 1 Test Print output of halftone Service mode Select 5 for COPIER TEST PG TYPE 2 Check if there is no image with uneven density white spots 3 Perform the following remedy when images with uneven density white spots are generated when executing the service mode 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 283 ...

Page 295: ...ver on page 145 6 Removing the Waste Toner Container on page 221 7 Removing the Registration Drive Unit on page 238 CAUTION Be sure not to touch the surface A of the roller when disassembling assembling A A A If the Registration Roller 2 and the Pre registration Roller 1 are replaced separately not simultaneously it may generate a difference in feeding speed and cause feeding problems such as geom...

Page 296: ...density white spots are generated on the front side 1 Remove the Right Cover Stopper Front 1 and the Right Cover Stopper Rear 2 2 Hooks 3 2 Shafts 4 1 2 3 4 2 Remove the Swing Guide 1 2 Shafts 2 1 2 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 285 ...

Page 297: ...ness Guide 1 1 Connector 2 Harness Guide A 2x 1x 1 2 A 4 Loosen the 2 screws 2 of the Registration Pickup Unit 1 1 2 2x 5 Lift the Registration Pickup Unit 1 and tighten the 2 screws 2 2 2 2x 1 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 286 ...

Page 298: ... density white spots are not generated Adjust again the Registration Pickup Unit if images with uneven density white spots are generated Procedure when images with uneven density white spots are generated on the rear side 1 Remove the Right Cover Stopper Front 1 and the Right Cover Stopper Rear 2 2 Hooks 3 2 Shafts 4 1 2 3 4 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 287 ...

Page 299: ...Swing Guide 1 2 Shafts 2 1 2 2 3 Remove the Right Cover Harness Guide 1 1 Connector 2 Harness Guide A 2x 1x 1 2 A 4 Loosen the 2 screws 2 of the Registration Pickup Unit 1 1 2 2x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 288 ...

Page 300: ...at images with uneven density white spots are not generated 7 End if images with uneven density white spots are not generated Adjust again the Registration Pickup Unit if images with uneven density white spots are generated Removing the Delivery Reverse Unit Preparation 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly on page 254 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 289 ...

Page 301: ... the Cassette 1 Lifter Drive Unit Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 2 Removing the Left Upper Cover on page 144 3 Removing the Fax Speaker Unit on page 214 4 Removing the Fax Unit on page 214 5 Removing the Main Controller Unit on page 189 6 Removing the Low voltage Power Supply Unit on page 201 7 Removing the DC Controller PCB on page 194 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 290 ...

Page 302: ... Waste Toner Container on page 221 10 Remove the Drum Unit Bk Removing the Drum Unit Y M C Bk on page 222 Procedure 1 Remove the High voltage Contact Guide 1 1 1 Claw 2 2 Hooks 3 2 Bosses 4 1x 1 2 3 3 4 4 2 Move the High voltage Contact Guide 2 1 1 Claw 2 2 Bosses 3 1x 1 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 291 ...

Page 303: ...ook 4 2 Bosses 5 2x 2x 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 5 Installation 1 Insert the hook 4 of the Cassette 1 Lifter Drive Unit 1 inside the hole A of the Rear Plate and secure the unit in place with the 2 screws 3 2 Bosses 5 2 Connectors 2 4 A 1 2 2 3 3 5 5 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 292 ...

Page 304: ...law 2 2 Hooks 3 2 Bosses 4 1 2 3 3 4 4 1x Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Drive Unit Preparation 1 Removing the Rear Cover 1 on page 140 2 Removing the Secondary Transfer High voltage PCB Developing High voltage PCB Unit on page 196 3 Removing the Cassette 1 Lifter Drive Unit on page 290 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 293 ...

Page 305: ... Procedure 1 Pull out the cassette 1 1 2 Move the Harness Guide 1 1 Boss 2 1 Hook 3 1 2 3 3 Remove the Rail Cover 1 2 Claws 2 1 Hook 3 1 2 3 1x 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 294 ...

Page 306: ...it 1 4 Screws 2 2 Connectors 3 4x 2x 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 Actions after assembly Execute Auto Correct Color Mismatch Settings Registration Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 295 ...

Page 307: ... front side C White Plate Cover Glass D and Copyboard Glass E with a glass cleaning sheet If soiling is still remarkable clean them with wet and tightly wrung lint free paper and then wipe with dry soft cloth A B C D E Cleaning the Dustproof Glass Procedure 1 Open the Front Cover 1 2 Remove the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 296 ...

Page 308: ...Preparation 1 Removing the Waste Toner Container on page 221 2 Remove the Drum Unit Y Removing the Drum Unit Y M C Bk on page 222 Procedure CAUTION Do not clean the drum surface A with a blower 1 or lint free paper 2 1 2 A A 1 Put the removed Drum Unit Y 1 on a sheet of paper 2 2 Cover the removed Drum Unit Y 1 with a paper 3 to block the light for Drum 4 1 2 3 4 3 Clean the A part of the Drum Uni...

Page 309: ...ving the Waste Toner Container on page 221 2 Remove the Drum Unit Bk Removing the Drum Unit Y M C Bk on page 222 3 Removing the ITB Unit on page 225 Procedure 1 While opening the RD Sensor Shutter 1 clean the surface A of the Patch Sensor with a blower After cleaning check that there is no soiling caused by toner on the surface A of the sensor If the soiling cannot be removed perform step 2 4 Part...

Page 310: ...l because it causes melting and clouding of the sensor window Do not dry wipe the sensor window because it is charged to attract toner 1 A NOTE How to install the ITB Unit 1 Hold the 2 handles 1 align the 2 protrusions B of the ITB Unit 2 with the 2 grooves A of the rails of the ITB Unit and then put the unit inside the machine A B A B 1 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 299 ...

Page 311: ...Pull the Right Cover Open Close Lever 1 and open the Right Cover Unit 2 1 2 2 Release the lock of the Right Cover Stopper Front 1 and the Right Cover Stopper Rear 2 and then further open the Right Cover Unit 3 1 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 300 ...

Page 312: ...ont Guide 2 using lint free paper 1 soaked with alcohol 1 2 A Cleaning the Registration Roller Pre registration Roller Procedure 1 Pull the Right Cover Open Close Lever 1 and open the Right Cover Unit 2 1 2 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 301 ...

Page 313: ...her open the Right Cover Unit 3 1 2 3 3 Clean the surface A using lint free paper 1 soaked with alcohol while rotating the Registration Roller 2 1 2 A 4 Clean the surface A using lint free paper 1 soaked with alcohol while rotating the Pre registration Roller 2 1 2 A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 302 ...

Page 314: ...Pull the Right Cover Open Close Lever 1 and open the Right Cover Unit 2 1 2 2 Release the lock of the Right Cover Stopper Front 1 and the Right Cover Stopper Rear 2 and then further open the Right Cover Unit 3 1 2 3 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 303 ...

Page 315: ...cohol 1 2 A Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide Preparation 1 Removing the Fixing Assembly on page 254 Procedure CAUTION Be sure to start removing the Fixing Assembly after it is cooled down enough The Fixing Assembly right after printing may cause burn injury 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 304 ...

Page 316: ...1 Clean the Fixing Inlet Guide A with lint free paper 1 moistened with alcohol CAUTION Do not damage the Fixing Film 1 when cleaning 1 1 A 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning 305 ...

Page 317: ...Adjustment 5 Actions at Parts Replacement 307 Original Exposure System 313 Pickup Feed System 314 ...

Page 318: ...ase of restoration failure of backup data COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT 2 Execute the following service mode to back up the service mode setting values Lv 2 COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP During execution ACTIVE flashes in the status column of the service mode It takes approx 2 minutes Upon success OK is displayed in the status column 3 After confirming that OK is displayed in the status column ...

Page 319: ...1 Yes 9 Setting items for each menu in Main Menu Copy Scan and Send Fax Scan and Store Access Stored Files Fax I Fax Inbox Favorite Settings Yes 1 Yes 8 Yes 9 Default Settings Yes 8 Yes 9 Shortcut settings for Options Yes 8 Yes 9 Previous Settings Yes 8 Setting items for Quick Menu Button Size information Yes 9 Wallpaper Setting Yes 9 Button information in Quick Menu Yes 9 Restrict Quick Menu Yes ...

Page 320: ...nagement Service 6 Remote UI Settings Registration Management Settings Device Management Save Audit Log Audit log that was exported cannot be put back to the device from which the log was exported 7 Settings Registration Management Settings Data Management TPM Settings 8 Download mode 5 Backup Restore 3 MEAP Backup Meapback bin Backup is possible using SST or USB memory The data saved using a MEAP...

Page 321: ...IER FUNCTION CCD CL AGC 3 ADF white level adjustment 1 Place an A4 or LTR size paper on the Copyboard Glass and execute the service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 2 Place an A4 or LTR size paper on the ADF and execute the service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL2 4 Write the values on the service label for the Reader back side of the Front door COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT X COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT ...

Page 322: ... to adjust the ADF white level 1 Place an A4 or LTR size paper on the Copyboard Glass and execute the following service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 2 Place an A4 or LTR size paper on the ADF and execute the following service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL2 3 Follow the steps shown below to perform the paper back shading correction 1 Cleaning the reading side 1 Locations for cleaning Stream...

Page 323: ...ode values on the service label for the Reader on the Front Door of the host machine COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF3 xxx 8 Execute the following service modes to adjust the reading start position as needed COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ S Adjustment of the Reader shading position COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y DF Adjustment of the reading start position DADF front side horizontal scanning direction COPIER ADJUST ADJ...

Page 324: ...alue A B 0 1 5 mm B A Copy of the test chart Feed direction 1 Loosen the 4 Right Hinge Fixation Screws and make the adjustment by moving the hinge installation position back and forth 4x 1 1 2 2 2 Place a test chart on the ADF again and make a copy again 3 Repeat the steps 1 to 2 until the skew amount falls within the specified value 4 When the skew amount is within the range tighten the Fixation ...

Page 325: ... PG TYPE 5 COPIER TEST PG COLOR K 1 COPIER TEST PG COLOR Y M C 0 COPIER TEST PG 2 SIDE 1 COPIER TEST PG PG PICK each paper source 2 Press the Start key A test print 2 sided print is output from each paper source 3 Check the output test print NOTE At 2 sided printing paper is output with the 1st side up and 2nd side down When checking the leading edge margin on the 1st side check the up side of pap...

Page 326: ...2 Check the value of the scale on the Adjustment Plate 3 Loosen the Fixation Screw 1x 5 Adjustment 315 ...

Page 327: ...t edge margin is increased by 0 5 mm 5 Tighten the Fixation Screw 6 Return the cassette to its original position NOTE If you are concerned with the difference in level of the cassettes after mechanical adjustment adjust it by loosening the 2 screws 1x 1x 7 Check that the left edge margin of the paper picked up from the cassette is within the specified range 5 Adjustment 316 ...

Page 328: ...e Tray 2 Execute the following service modes to adjust the image position on the left edge Front side COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C1 Adjustment of the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at pickup from the Cassette 1 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C2 Adjustment of the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction at pickup from the Cassette 2 COPIER ADJUST ...

Page 329: ...ack side 2 5 2 0 mm For LTR Front side 4 2 mm 1 5 mm Back side 4 2 2 0 mm Feed Direction COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REGIST COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG THCK COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C1 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C2 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C3 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C4 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ MF COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C1RE COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C2RE COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C3RE COP...

Page 330: ...shooting 6 List of Initial Check Items 320 Test Print 321 List of Troubleshooting Items 325 Startup System Failure Diagnosis 335 Controller Self Diagnosis 345 Boot Method 346 Diagnosis Result 347 Debug Log 350 ...

Page 331: ...he output Checking the pa per 7 The Canon recommended paper is used 8 The paper is not moistened Set paper by taking it out from a new package to output Checking the pa per setting 9 Paper that is within the specified volume is correctly set in the Cassette and Multi purpose Tray 10 When using transparency film the transparency is set in the correct direction in the Multi purpose Tray Checking the...

Page 332: ...ge halftone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 Grid Yes Yes Yes 7 to 9 For R D use 10 YMCBk horizontal stripes vertical scanning direction Yes Yes Yes 11 For R D use 12 YMCBk 64 grada tions Yes Yes Yes 13 to 100 For R D use Steps to Select a Test Print Type 1 Set the number of sheets paper size etc in the following service mode COPIER TEST PG PG PICK Setting of the test print paper source COPIER TEST PG 2 SIDE...

Page 333: ...ed cause Gradation Check that the 16 density gradations are recognizable Drum Unit error or Laser Scanner Unit error Fogging Check whether fogging appears only in the blank area Drum Unit error or Laser Scanner Unit error White line Check the entire image for any white line Drum Unit error or Laser Scanner Unit error Uneven density rear front Check for any uneven density between the rear and front...

Page 334: ...ng on the laser light path Uneven density at reg ular intervals Check the entire image for any uneven density at reg ular intervals Drum Unit error Uneven density Check the entire image for any uneven density Soiling on the Dustproof Glass Deterioration of the ITB Grid TYPE 6 This test print is mainly used to check color displacement right angle accuracy and linearity Check item Checking Method As...

Page 335: ...or Damage to the Drum Unit Soiling on the Primary Charging Roller White line Check that there is no white line in the solid area of each color ITB Unit error Secondary Transfer Outer Roller error Soiling on the laser light path 64 Gradations TYPE 12 This test print is mainly used to check the single color gradation performance of each of Y M C and Bk at a time Check item Checking Method Assumed ca...

Page 336: ...nit Cannot Be Removed Due to a Disengagement Error of the Primary Transfer Roller The ITB Unit Cannot Be Removed Due to a Disengage ment Error of the Primary Transfer Roller on page 331 Troubleshooting by Forcible Stop of Paper Feed Troubleshooting by Forcible Stop of Paper Feed on page 331 Image Failure Color Displacement in the Image Due to a Failure of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Front R...

Page 337: ...oreign matter when it enters the Fixing Inlet Guide disrupting the paper entry balance and causing the possibility of wrinkle in the area from the leading edge to the trailing edge of paper Condition When duplex copying or duplex printing of solid image is continued Field Remedy Perform the following procedure 1 Refer to Removing the Fixing Assembly on page 254 and remove the Fixing Assembly CAUTI...

Page 338: ... Feedability between the Secondary Transfer Nip and the Fixing Nip Location Fixing nip Cause When envelopes are fed in both the secondary transfer nip and fixing nip the behavior at the time of feed may cause wrinkle in envelopes It may occur more frequently to envelopes which have absorbed moisture Condition When envelopes have not been loaded properly or when the alignment between the secondary ...

Page 339: ...lly attached to the surface of the Bk Drum 2 On the other hand when the color toner image a on the ITB 3 that has passed through the Y Drum M Drum and C Drum reaches the Bk Drum 2 a part of the surface is slightly transferred on to the Bk Drum 2 This transfer symptom is hereafter referred to as retransferring The amount of toner retransferred here becomes smaller in the area b on the surface of th...

Page 340: ...cled 2 76 to 90 g m2 Smaller than A4 210 mm 1TR_TGM3 1TR_TGC3 1TR_TK43 1TR_TGC3 1TR_ TK43 1TR_TK43 A4 210 mm or larger 1TR_TGM 1TR_TGC 1TR_TGK4 1TR_TGC 1TR_ TGK4 1TR_TGK4 Plain 3 91 to 105 g m2 Recycled 3 91 to 105 g m2 ALL 1TR_TGM3 1TR_TGC3 1TR_TK43 1TR_TGC3 1TR_ TK43 1TR_TK43 Other paper types ALL 1TR_TGM2 1TR_TGC2 1TR_TK42 1TR_TGC2 1TR_ TK42 1TR_TK42 2 Select the following service mode and pres...

Page 341: ...2 1 2TR H2 2 Heavy 4 5 2TR H3 1 2TR H3 2 Color 2TR CP 1 2TR CP 2 Transparency 2TR O 1 Label 2TR LA 1 Bond 2TR B 1 2TR B 2 Punch 2TR PA 1 2TR PA 2 Envelope 2TR EN 1 2TR EN 2 Postcard 2TR P 1 2TR P 2 The setting range is 128 to 127 Changing the setting value default 0 by 1 changes the secondary transfer voltage by 30 V NOTE When the secondary transfer voltage is too high or when the paper type is ch...

Page 342: ...Follow the procedure shown below to remove the ITB Unit from the host machine 1 Open the Front Cover 1 2 Open the Right Cover Unit 2 3 Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the hole B 4 Rotate the flat blade screwdriver in a counterclockwise direction until it creates an opening A between the Secondary Transfer Idler Roller Shaft Support 3 and the RD Sensor Stay 4 5 Remove the Drum Unit 6 Remove th...

Page 343: ...he ITB Unit Drum Unit after manually disengaging the Primary Transfer Roller refer to the Service Manual for the procedure If a normal jam cord is displayed the paper is jammed at a position other than the specified position When a job in which the paper does not pass the specified stop position is executed the setting to forcibly stop the paper becomes disabled Unfixed toner may be attached depen...

Page 344: ...king of the image on the ITB 0 Not forcibly stopped 1 After pickup from the Cas sette 1 Yes Yes Yes 2 After pickup from the Cas sette 2 Yes Yes Yes 3 After pickup from the Cas sette 3 Yes Yes Yes 4 After pickup from the Cas sette 4 Yes Yes Yes 20 Pre registration 1st side Yes Yes Yes 21 Pre registration 2nd side Yes Yes Yes 30 Secondary pre transfer 1st side Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 31 Secondary pre tr...

Page 345: ...the remedy to be performed when a non Canon product message is displayed even though Canon made toner is used Remedy Perform a remedy according to the instruction of the alarm 1 Toner Bottle Alarm code At the same time 10 0091 0094 occurs 6 Troubleshooting 334 ...

Page 346: ...ming the works shown above be sure to restart the host machine and check if the symptom occurs again WARNING When a tester is used to perform a check the AC voltage may be measured There is a possibility of electrical shock so caution is required during the work NOTE The numbers such as 1 and 2 shown in the flow diagram indicate that there is a check item table showing the items to be checked in t...

Page 347: ...h Turn ON the power switch Start NO Perform a controller self diagnosis Check that the machine can be started without any problem Turn OFF the main power switch and check for disconnection of the power plug and the Power Supply Cord Perform the Control Panel check flow 2 Does the bar remain displayed on the Control Panel LCD 3 Does the logo remain displayed on the Control Panel LCD Perform the fol...

Page 348: ...No Check item Check point 2 Only the bar is displayed 3 The logo is displayed 4 E code is displayed E602 0001 An error has occurred Turn OFF the main power 6 Troubleshooting 337 ...

Page 349: ...n Power LED Pattern 2 2 Is an error code displayed on the Control Panel LCD Replace the following parts Main Controller PCB NO Finish Start Replace the micro USB cable connecting the Main Controller PCB J4502 and the Control Panel Unit J1021 Replace the mini HDMI cable connecting the Main Controller PCB J4501 and the Control Panel Unit J1020 Replace the Control Panel If the above does not resolve ...

Page 350: ... error has occurred Turn OFF the main power 3 Main Controller PCB LED8 LED8 Reference example 5 V Power Supply Assembly Check Flow If 5 V power is not supplied to the PCB the location of the problem can be identified by checking the PCB jack and pins supplying power to the PCB All night Power Supply PCB Main Controller PCB Low voltage Power Supply PCB J6 J301 J306 AC AC J5 J4509 J4502 DC 5V DC 5V ...

Page 351: ...ng parts Micro USB Cable Main Controller PCB Control Panel CPU PCB YES NO Start 6 Is AC supplied to the Low voltage Power Supply PCB J301 5 Is AC output from the Low voltage Power Supply PCB J306 4 Is AC supplied to the All night Power Supply PCB J6 3 Is DC 5 V output from the All night Power Supply PCB J5 2 Is DC 5 V supplied to the Main Controller PCB J4509 NO 1 Is the Control Panel Energy Saver...

Page 352: ...ing this connector be sure to remove the HDD in advance Note that the error code displayed in this case can be ignored 1pin 4pin J4509 3 All night Power Supply PCB Connector side of J5 Pin 1 5 V and pin 6 GND Normal value DC 5 V 1pin 6pin J5 4 All night Power Supply PCB Connector side of J6 Pin 1 and pin 3 Normal value AC voltage CAUTION Be careful when you measure the AC voltage J6 1pin 3pin 6 Tr...

Page 353: ...Check Flow If 12 V power is not supplied to the PCB the location of the problem can be identified by checking the PCB jack and pins supplying power to the PCB Low voltage Power Supply PCB Main Controller PCB J301 AC J313 J4509 J4502 micro USB DC 12V J1021 Control Panel CPU PCB DC 12V 12 V Power Supply Assembly Block Diagram 12 V power is supplied from the Low voltage Power Supply PCB when a signal...

Page 354: ...Controller PCB J4509 Replace the following parts Micro USB Cable Harness between the Low voltage Power Supply PCB and the Main Controller PCB Main Controller PCB Control Panel CPU PCB Low voltage Power Supply NO 1 Is the LED6002 of the Main Controller PCB ON Finish YES NO 12 V Power Supply Assembly Check Flow Check item No Check item Check point 1 Main Controller PCB LED6002 LED6002 6 Troubleshoot...

Page 355: ... the HDD in advance Note that the error code dis played in this case can be ig nored 5pin 8pin J4509 3 Low voltage Power Supply PCB Connector side of J301 Pin 1 and pin 3 Normal value AC voltage CAUTION Be careful when you meas ure the AC voltage CAUTION Before measuring the volt age be sure to remove the All night Power Supply PCB J301 3pin 1pin 6 Troubleshooting 344 ...

Page 356: ...CBs such as TPM installed on the Main Controller PCB is suspected PCBs and units diagnosed by the tool are as follow Main Controller PCB TPM PCB Flash PCB Memory PCB HDD Reader HDD Option Option All night Non all night Power Supply DC Controler PCB Main Controller PCB Operation panel Flash PCB Controller system failure diagnosis tool The area framed in blue dotted line in the figure shows the comp...

Page 357: ...ck start SN 1 IA DDR2 SDRAM check start NOTE When this tool is not installed correctly the regular Startup screen is displayed In this case perform the following remedy Turn OFF the Main Power Switch again and execute steps 1 and 2 shown above If this tool still does not boot it means that BCT Box Checker Test is deleted so install BCT If BCT is not installed correctly is displayed in Service Mode...

Page 358: ...w no SN 9 PCI Configuration PCI Bridge NG SN 13 TPM no SN 19 O SDRAM Please Turn off main switch NO means that optional PCBs are not mounted A fault has occurred when NO is displayed irrespective of whether the Option PCB is attached NG means that an error occurred to PCBs mounted as standard Controller System Error Diagnosis Table The error locations are identified according to the following tabl...

Page 359: ...ck up the customer data If the Check Result shows CAUTION it is recommended to back up the customer da ta If 20 MB s or less is displayed for Perform ance it is recommended to replace the HDD If the Exec SN 100 HDD HEALTH CHECK shows NG replace the HDD SN 23 FAN check start Exec SN 23 FAN OK SN 100 HDD HEALTH CHECK check start S M A R T Check 05 Reallocated Sectors Count 00000000000000 c5 Current ...

Page 360: ... of defective sectors uncorrect able sectors which do not allow alter native processing If a numeric value apart from 0000000000000 is displayed backup is recommended to avoid losing customer data Replace the HDD Alarm 31 0008 may have occurred in the Host Machine 6 Troubleshooting 349 ...

Page 361: ...10 logs in total Automatic logs Logs that are automatically saved to the machine when an event exceptional behavior error code or reboot occurs Logs of the Main Controller RCON and DCON are saved together with manual logs as up to 10 logs in total Continuous logs Logs that are continuously saved while the machine is running Up to 100 logs of only the Main Controller can be stored Key operation log...

Page 362: ...rded User operation logs are saved together with Sublogs and collected as logs contained in Sublog files Among the saved user operation logs the confidential information shown below is masked Password entered from the software keyboard PIN PIN code etc entered from the Numeric Keypad Information that is hidden by turned letters on the UI screen CAUTION Be sure to obtain user s permission in advanc...

Page 363: ...problem still occurring or just finished occurring See Case D of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs See Case B of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs See Case C of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs See Case D of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs See Case A of the Procedure for Obtaining Logs Does the problem repeat restart Does the problem cause the Control Panel to be locked Network packet logs need to ...

Page 364: ...e is displayed in text logs cannot be obtained Case E Problems other than above Not necessary Execute Collection of Log with SST etc Check with the user on the date and time when the problem occurred and the procedure NOTE When an unexpected error E code error or problem of restart occurs the log can be automatically saved to the hard disk To automatically save logs to the hard disk confirm that t...

Page 365: ...over from sleep mode Refer to the following regarding installation on to the Controller PCB DEBUG SRAM PCB Reference example of installation Work Flow The flow of saving collecting Sublogs is shown below 1 Preparation Refer to Flow of Determining the Procedure for Obtaining Logs on page 352 and make the preparation as needed according to a situation where an event has occurred 2 Reproduction of th...

Page 366: ...nformation helps to find the operation log where the problem occurred When R D reproduces the failure it is necessary to use information such as the procedure used by the customer frequency of use and job data at the time of occurrence of the failure 6 Remove the board installed in step 1 and return the settings back to the original values Preparation Follow the procedure shown below to make prepa...

Page 367: ... of Collecting Network Packet Logs Configure initial settings as needed Setting the overwrite function 1 To enable this function set 1 in the following service mode Lv 2 Service mode COPIER TEST NET CAP OVERWRIT NOTE When this setting is enabled old logs will be overwritten If the symptom cannot be reproduced disable this setting setting value 0 and secure logs save them using SST or USB After sec...

Page 368: ...part includes the actual data Enabling this function discards the actual payload data and extracts only the data from the header part which has the following effects Can be used when customer data is not allowed to be extracted Can be used in an environment where traffic is highly overloaded Header part Data part Discarded part Packet data structure image Setting the filter function 1 To enable th...

Page 369: ...o disable and then transfer the license but it is not necessary to transfer the LMS license after that 3 Hold down the Counter key on the Control Panel for approx 10 seconds and then press 1 2 and 3 in that order on the Numeric Keypad 2 2 1 1 4 Check that Storing System Information is displayed on the Control Panel CAUTION While logs are being saved other operations cannot be performed Storing Sys...

Page 370: ...USB device or a PC with SST installed The procedure for storing Sublogs to a USB device differs from that for storing Sublogs to a PC Collecting into a USB Device To save collect Sublogs to a USB device perform the procedure shown below to collect the logs If SST is used to save collect Sublogs to a PC this work is not necessary 1 Execute the following service mode with a USB flash drive connected...

Page 371: ... Numeric Keypad Sublog Download EventLog CuntinuousLog Event Logs lastest 10 files 20161010_14 00 V_exception ContinuousLog Period 20161012_0521 15 to 20161013_1733 36 Toral 102files Execute OK 0 CANCEL Any other keys Saving to a PC with SST installed Follow the procedure shown below to save collect Sublogs to a PC using SST If a USB device is used to save collect Sublogs this work is not necessar...

Page 372: ...ion with the device is completed the screen shown below will appear Select Upload Data The set of data stored in the device is shown on the right Click at Log to expand the tree and check that there are continuous logs date_model number_clog bin 6 Troubleshooting 361 ...

Page 373: ...they are not necessary for analysis 6 Enter a file name arbitrary and click the SAVE button to save the file to the PC Checking the Saved Files Sublog files See the folder shown below to check that the collected Sublogs are correctly stored In case of a USB device Root folder of the USB device In case of SST PC s C ServData model name serial number folder 6 Troubleshooting 362 ...

Page 374: ...rsion Serial Number YYYYMMDD_HH MM 20161012_14 48_ZZZ99999_V1406_ServiceCall E719 0031 Cause of occurrence Firmware Version Serial Number YYYYMMDD_HH MM Manual logs 20161013_10 10_ZZZ99999_V 1308_Debuglog Cnt123 Identification indicating that a key operation was performed Firmware Version Serial Number YYYYMMDD_HH MM CAUTION The event log and manual log are collected as one file shown below 201610...

Page 375: ...it is opened using Windows standard Notepad it cannot be displayed correctly due to line feed codes Use WordPad or a text editor to open it Report files Report files saved to the USB device are stored in the folder under the name shown below where the firmware is stored Serial No Date year month day hour minute 12 digits 6 Troubleshooting 364 ...

Page 376: ...Error Jam Alarm 7 Overview 366 EError Code 369 Jam Code 457 Alarm Code 464 ...

Page 377: ...column The displayed location code differs depending on the configuration of the options installed In the case of alarm codes the location information does not have any specific meaning Device Location code Error code Jam code Not known 00 ADF 04 01 Finisher 02 02 Reader 04 Printer 05 00 Controller 00 Fax 07 Pickup Position Code When a jam occurs the pickup location is indicated with the following...

Page 378: ...LGL Government LEGAL I C5 ISOC5 GLTR Government LETTER I C6 ISOC6 IND LGL India LEGAL I C7 ISOC7 COM10 COM10 I SRA3 SRA3 DL DL J B0 JISB0 E_C2 Nagagata 2 J B1 JISB1 E_C3 Nagagata 3 J B2 JISB2 E_C4 Nagagata 4 J B3 JISB3 E_C5 Nagagata 5 J B4 JISB4 E K2 Kakugata 2 J B5 JISB5 E_K3 Kakugata 3 J B6 JISB6 E_K4 Kakugata 4 J B7 JISB7 E_K5 Kakugata 5 K16 K16 E_K6 Kakugata 6 K8 K8 E_K7 Kakugata 7 ND PCD Newd...

Page 379: ... CON while any login application other than User Authentication is error such as not displayed login screen occurred In this case access SMS once and switch login application to User Authentication to recover to the normal status Points to Note When Clearing HDD As a remedy for error codes E602 XXXX E611 0000 HDD partition is selected and the target partition may be cleared When clearing partition...

Page 380: ...J315 and J322 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J20 and J22 Harness between the Fixing Drawer DR01 J5401 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J134 Fixing Assembly Low voltage Power Supply PCB UN01 DC Controller PCB UN04 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data af...

Page 381: ...ntroller PCB UN04 J20 and J22 Harness between the Fixing Drawer DR01 J5401 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J134 Fixing Assembly Low voltage Power Supply PCB UN01 DC Controller PCB UN04 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the ...

Page 382: ...ower Supply PCB UN01 J315 and J322 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J20 and J22 Harness between the Fixing Drawer DR01 J5401 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J134 Fixing Assembly Low voltage Power Supply PCB UN01 DC Controller PCB UN04 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and resto...

Page 383: ... Power Supply PCB UN01 J315 and J322 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J20 and J22 Harness between the Fixing Drawer DR01 J5401 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J134 Fixing Assembly Low voltage Power Supply PCB UN01 DC Controller PCB UN04 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and res...

Page 384: ...TEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E004 0001 05 Fixing Relay welding detection error Detection Description Zero cross interruption was detected although the Fixing Relay was not turned ON Remedy Remedy Check replace the Low voltage Power Supply PCB UN01 Caution Since an electrical trouble due to error in fixing safety circuit relay is the cause of the error be sure to ...

Page 385: ...COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E009 0002 05 Fixing disengagement timeout error Detection Description Signal of the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor could not be detected at pressure release operation of the Fixing Pressure Release Cam and the operation was not completed within 4 sec from the start of counterclockwise rotation of the Fixing M...

Page 386: ...COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E009 0004 05 Fixing disengagement retry error Detection Description Signal of the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor could not be detected at pressure release operation of the Fixing Pressure Release Cam and the operation was not completed within 3 times from the start of counterclockwise rotation of the Fixing M...

Page 387: ...COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E009 0006 05 Fixing disengagement timeout error Detection Description At retry of disengagement operation of the Fixing Pressure Release Cam the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor did not detect engagement state within 4 sec after the start of counterclockwise rotation of the Fixing Motor Remedy Related parts R1 ...

Page 388: ... be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E010 0002 05 Bk Drum_ITB Motor error Detection Description The specified speed could not be detected for 500 consecutive msec although it became the specified speed at least once from the startup of the Bk Drum_ITB Motor in the Main Drive Unit Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between th...

Page 389: ...on COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E012 0001 05 CL Drum Motor error Detection Description It did not become the specified speed for 500 consecutive msec although 1000 msec have passed from the startup of the CL Drum Motor in the Main Drive Unit The detection timing varies depending on the paper feed conditions Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the CL Drum Motor M01 J5701 and the DC...

Page 390: ...ata may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E012 0003 05 CL Drum Motor error Detection Description There was no FG signal input for 300 msec from the startup of the CL Drum Motor in the Main Drive Unit Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the CL Drum Motor M01 J5701 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J140 Fuse i...

Page 391: ... FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E014 0002 05 Fixing Motor error Detection Description The specified speed could not be detected for 500 consecutive msec although it became the specified speed at least once from the startup of the Fixing Motor The detection timing varies depending on the paper feed conditions Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between th...

Page 392: ... Replace the DC Controller PCB b If the measurement value is 1 ohm or higher non conduction state replace the DC Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DS...

Page 393: ...Y was not available and the output value SigR of the ATR Sensor Y did not fall within the range from 50 or higher to 800 or less for 2 consecutive times Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J160 and the Drum Unit Relay PCB Y UN08 J6001 Drum Unit Y DC Controller PCB UN04 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 If the D...

Page 394: ... PCB M was not available and the output value SigR of the ATR Sensor M did not fall within the range from 50 or higher to 800 or less for 2 consecutive times Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J160 and the Drum Unit Relay PCB M UN09 J6002 Drum Unit M DC Controller PCB UN04 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 If ...

Page 395: ...PCB C was not available and the output value SigR of the ATR Sensor C did not fall within the range from 50 or higher to 800 or less for 2 consecutive times Remedy Related parts Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J162 and the Drum Unit Relay PCB Y UN10 J6003 Drum Unit C DC Controller PCB UN04 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 If the Dru...

Page 396: ... COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E020 04C0 05 Error in take up of Sealing Member Bk Detection Description The patch output value SigR failed to be 900 or less during initialization of the Drum Unit Bk Remedy Remedy Check replace the Drum Unit Bk E020 04F0 05 Error in toner density Bk at communication failure of the Drum Unit Memory PCB Bk D...

Page 397: ... be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E021 0002 05 Developing Motor error Detection Description The specified speed could not be detected for 500 consecutive msec although it became the specified speed at least once from the startup of the Developing Motor Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Developing Motor M03 J5...

Page 398: ...dy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Drum Unit Relay PCB Y UN08 J6001 and the DC Controller PCB UN04 J160 Drum Unit Relay PCB Y UN08 Drum Unit Memory PCB Y UN12 Drum Unit Y DC Controller PCB UN04 Main Drive Unit Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 If the Drum Unit Memory PCB Y is soiled clean it with a blower 2 Check replace the related har...

Page 399: ...it Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 If the Drum Unit Memory PCB Bk is soiled clean it with a blower 2 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected B...

Page 400: ...Bottle Rotation Sensor M PS07 J5302 Bottle Rotation Sensor M PS07 Bottle Drive Unit YM Toner Container M Hopper Unit M DC Controller PCB UN04 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts CAUTION Be sure to turn over the Door Lock Lever when removing the Bottle Drive Unit YM and rotating the drive section by hand Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the ser...

Page 401: ...o toner in the container Remedy Related parts R1 00 Main Drive Unit Hopper Unit C Toner Bottle Mount Unit C Drum Unit C Toner Container C Remedy Be sure to perform the following procedure 1 Shake the Toner Container 10 times and then insert it into the host machine 2 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference If a user inserts an empty Toner Container C repeatedly the er...

Page 402: ...dy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared Check the background regular reflection output value front in COPIER level 2 DISPLAY DENS P B P C a If the value is less than 10 1 Check if the sensor window of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Front is soiled If it is soiled clean it with a blower 2 Check that the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Front Shutter is pr...

Page 403: ...r 2 Check that the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Rear Shutter is properly installed and it is not damaged or deformed If it is deformed or damaged replace the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Rear 3 Check the operation of the Registration Shutter Solenoid 3 1 If the Registration Shutter Solenoid moves 3 1 1 Replace the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Rear 3 1 2 Replace the DC Controller PCB 3 2 If t...

Page 404: ...contact with the plate while the cable sheath is peeled 4 Disconnect the connector J24 of the DC Controller while the Front Cover and the Right Cover are closed and measure the resistance value between the connectors J24 1 pin and the J24 3 pin on the J24 harness side using a tester a If the measurement value is less than 1 ohm conduction state 1 Replace the DC Controller PCB 2 Replace the Low vol...

Page 405: ...DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E074 0002 05 Error in Primary Transfer Roller operation Detection Description The ITB Pressure Release Switch could not detect the engagement operation within the specified period of time at engagement operation of the Primary Transfer Roller Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J162 and the ITB Pressure R...

Page 406: ...ected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E102 0001 05 EEPROM error Detection Description An error has occurred in EEPROM of the Laser Scanner Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J110 and the Y M C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN05 J202 Flexible Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN81 J7002 and the Y M C Bk La...

Page 407: ...COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E110 0002 05 Scanner Motor error Detection Description The speed was not locked by BD control within 10 sec after startup of Scanner Motor Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J110 and the Y M C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN05 J202 Flexible Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN81 ...

Page 408: ...ness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E193 0000 05 Communication error Detection Description NACK was received twice at communic...

Page 409: ...timeout occurred Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J110 and the Y M C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN05 J202 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J184 and the Developing High voltage PCB UN06 J241 Y M C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN05 Developing High voltage PCB UN06 DC Controller PCB UN04 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before...

Page 410: ... parts R1 00 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J110 and the Y M C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN05 J202 Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J184 and the Developing High voltage PCB UN06 J241 Y M C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN05 Developing High voltage PCB UN06 DC Controller PCB UN04 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PC...

Page 411: ...ation is reset by turning OFF and then ON the main power E196 020F 05 EEPROM communication error Detection Description The number of read write job data device information to the PCRG Y EEPROM exceeded the specified value Remedy Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the main power Reference Data device information is reset by turning OFF and then ON the main power E196 030F 05 EEPROM communication error Det...

Page 412: ... back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E196 0802 05 EEPROM communication error Detection Description Although write polling to the HVT EEPROM from the DC Controller PCB CPU was performed for 3 times no respon...

Page 413: ...COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E197 1000 05 Communication error Detection Description Although access to KONA2 ASIC in the DC Controller PCB from the DC Controller PCB CPU was performed the NACK a negative reply sent by the reception side to the sending side was received for 2 times Remedy Remedy Check replace the DC Controller PCB UN04 Re...

Page 414: ...le to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E197 2101 05 Communication error Detection Description Although access to KONA3 ASIC in the Cassette Module Controller PCB from the DC Controller PCB CPU was performed no response was received and timeout occurred Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB ...

Page 415: ...uction state replace the DC Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E202 0001 04 Scanner Unit HP error Detection Description The HP of the Scanner...

Page 416: ...ess between the Main Controller PCB UN81 J4509 and the Low voltage Power Supply PCB UN01 J313 Low voltage Power Supply PCB UN01 Main Controller PCB UN81 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protecte...

Page 417: ... if the initialization is executed at startup 2 1 If the initialization is not executed replace the DC Controller PCB 2 2 If the initialization is executed replace the Main Controller PCB Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION ...

Page 418: ...er and check whether the error is cleared 2 After replacing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 3 Replace the Main Controller PCB E248 0002 04 Reader backup error Detection Description The Controller IC of the Main Controller PCB failed to rewrite the Reader backup value in the Flash PCB Remedy Related parts R1 00 Flash PCB UN91 Main Controller PCB UN81 Remed...

Page 419: ...canner Unit back ADF UNIT Main Controller PCB UN81 Remedy Check replace the related parts After performing the remedy check that the copy image is output normally E302 0001 04 Error in paper front white shading Detection Description An error in the shading value was detected at white shading Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Scanner Unit front and the Main Controller PCB UN81 Scanner ...

Page 420: ...at scanning Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Reader Unit and Main Controller PCB Main Controller PCB Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Reinstall the latest system software using SST or a USB flash drive 2 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts E315 000D 00 Image process device timeout error Detection Descripti...

Page 421: ...ain Controller PCB E315 0531 00 Image process device timeout error Detection Description Compression processing of the scanned image into JPEG was not completed within the specified period of time Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Reader Unit and Main Controller PCB Main Controller PCB Reader Controller PCB Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is ...

Page 422: ...ales company E355 0003 00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company E355 0004 00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company E412 0005 04 Fan error Detection Description Stop of fan was detected after rotation signal for the ADF Cooling Fan was transmitted Remedy Related parts R1 00 ADF Cooling Fan Main Controller PC...

Page 423: ...4 5 Check the conditions of the front alignment drive parts belt and gear 6 Replace the Finisher Controller PCB 7 Replace the Harness Assembly E531 8001 02 Staple Motor error Detection Description The Staple Motor did not move from the HP Remedy 1 Check that the connector P9 1 P9 J9 of the Staple HP Sensor S11 is not disconnected 2 Check that the connector P10 1 P10 J10 of the Staple Motor M9 is n...

Page 424: ... 7 Replace the Harness Assembly E575 0001 02 Gripper Motor error Detection Description The Gripper Motor did not move from the HP Remedy 1 Check that the connector P7 14 P7 6 J7 6 P7 J7 of the Gripper HP Sensor S7 is not disconnected 2 Check that the connector P6 3 J6 3 P6 J6 of the Gripper Motor M7 is not disconnected 3 Replace the Gripper HP Sensor S7 4 Replace the Gripper Motor M7 5 Check the c...

Page 425: ... Guide Motor M6 5 Check the conditions of the tray auxiliary guide drive parts gear 6 Replace the Finisher Controller PCB 7 Replace the Harness Assembly E583 0002 02 Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor error Detection Description The Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor did not return to the HP Remedy 1 Check that the connector P8 12 P8 2 J8 2 P8 J8 of the Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor S6 is not disconnected 2 Chec...

Page 426: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 0111 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the PDL related file storage area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN81 J6003 J60...

Page 427: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 0211 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN8...

Page 428: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 0311 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the MEAP related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN81 J6003 J6004 and the H...

Page 429: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 0411 00 HDD error Detection Description Logical partition error was detected File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN81 J6003 J6004 and the HDD HDD Mai...

Page 430: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 0511 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN8...

Page 431: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 0611 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN8...

Page 432: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 0711 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in general application temporary area temporary file File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PC...

Page 433: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 0811 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the general application related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN81 J6003 ...

Page 434: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 0911 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in PDL spool data temporary file File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN81 J6003 J6004 a...

Page 435: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 1011 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the SEND related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN81 J6003 J6004 and the H...

Page 436: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 1111 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the update related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN81 J6003 J6004 and the...

Page 437: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 6 Check replace the related parts E602 1211 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the license related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN81 J6003 J6004 and th...

Page 438: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 6 Check replace the related parts E602 1311 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the system area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN81 J6003 J6004 and the HDD HDD...

Page 439: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 1411 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in SWAP temporary file alternative memory area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN81...

Page 440: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 1711 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the debug log area File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN81 J6003 J6004 and the HDD ...

Page 441: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 1811 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the image data storage area in Advanced Box File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN81...

Page 442: ...using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E602 1911 00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of data for printing File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Main Controller PCB UN81 J6003...

Page 443: ...her the error is cleared 1 Turn ON the main power and check whether the error is cleared 2 Execute the key clear using SST to make an unformatted disk CAUTION E602 0001 will be indicated if activating the machine with the unformatted disk Therefore be sure to format the HDD 3 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 4 Re...

Page 444: ...3 1024 00 Faulty insufficient image memory Detection Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB as indicated by 1024 E613 1536 00 Faulty insufficient image memory Detection Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB Remedy Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB as indicated by 1536 E613 2048 00 Memory error Det...

Page 445: ...ash PCB again to check that it is properly installed 2 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and execute Flash Format using a USB flash drive 3 After replacing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjustment Main Controller System and Appendix Backup Data List in the Service Manual E61...

Page 446: ...y HD CHECK it may occur again Thus perform Remedies 1 to 4 1 Check the related harness cable and connector 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 0 and execute HD CHECK Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 3 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjustment Main Controller System and Appendix Backup Data List in the...

Page 447: ...rder while checking whether the error is cleared Although the error is cleared by HD CHECK it may occur again Thus perform Remedies 1 to 4 1 Check the related harness cable and connector 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 0 and execute HD CHECK Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 3 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list Reference For backup and restoration...

Page 448: ...corded in the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 Flash PCB UN91 Main Controller PCB UN81 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared When prioritizing clearing of the error skip Remedies 2 and 3 Although the error is cleared by HD CHECK it may occur again Thus perform Remedies 1 to 4 1 Check the related harness cable and connector 2 Select COPIER FUNCTIO...

Page 449: ...etection Description An error was detected in the license related area Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts R1 00 Flash PCB UN91 Main Controller PCB UN81 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Obt...

Page 450: ...ng 2 8 startup Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 7 Check replace the related parts E614 0711 00 Flash PCB error Detection Description An error was detected in system setting value service mode etc storage area File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I O error after startup Remedy Related parts R1 00 Flash PCB UN91 Main Controll...

Page 451: ...ash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive E614 4003 00 Flash PCB error Detection Description The OS boot loader was not found When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 After turning OFF the main power remove and t...

Page 452: ...ash drive 3 After replacing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive E614 9002 00 Flash PCB error Detection Description Setting file error was detected at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 A...

Page 453: ...FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 0 and execute HD CHECK Then turn OFF and then ON the main power 3 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup data list Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjustment Main Controller System and Appendix Backup Data List in the Service Manual 4 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and execute Flash Format using a USB flash drive 5 After replacing the ...

Page 454: ...Description A communication error occurred when starting the Timer Device used for fax Remedy Check replace the Main Controller PCB E674 0020 07 Fax Board communication error Detection Description An error occurred in the modem IC used for fax Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Fax Board and the Main Controller PCB Fax Board Main Controller PCB Remedy Check replace the related harness ...

Page 455: ...egal connection is detected short circuit with Tx and Rx of IPC Remedy Check the connection between charging management equipment and machine and check that the Cable is not open circuit Clear the error while the charging management equipment is connected to operate and when switching to the operation without charging management equipment To prevent the misuse by removing the charging management e...

Page 456: ...720 0001 05 Error due to non compatible Finisher Detection Description Non compatible Finisher was connected Remedy Connect either the Staple Finisher Z1 E720 0100 05 Cassette Pedestal detection error Detection Description Connection of the Cassette Pedestal could not be detected Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB UN04 J190 the Drawer Unit DR03 J5904 and the Cass...

Page 457: ...s detected Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the READER ADF UNIT J6 J5 and the Main Controller PCB UN81 J4001 4002 READER ADF UNIT Main Controller PCB UN81 Remedy Check replace the related parts After performing the remedy check that the copy image is output normally E732 0021 00 Communication error Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the Main...

Page 458: ...perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after log collection E732 0F22 00 Communication error Detection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot If it is detected again immediately after reboot E732 0022 is generated Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after log collection E732 0F23 04 Communicat...

Page 459: ...M DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E733 0F00 05 Printer communication error Detection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot If it is detected again immediately after reboot E733 0000 is generated Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after log collection E733 0F01 05 Printer communication er...

Page 460: ...d at transmission and reception Remedy Upgrade the system software version to the latest one E746 0011 00 Voice Board error Detection Description Both the Voice Guidance PCB and the Voice Operation PCB are inserted Remedy Insert only 1 board of the appropriate voice board E746 0021 00 Image Analysis Board error Detection Description Self check NG of Image Analysis Board Remedy Perform the followin...

Page 461: ...d reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 2 Replace the TPM PCB Reference After replacing the TPM PCB if the TPM key was backed up restore the key 1 Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key 2 Execute Settings Registration Log In Management Settings Data Management TPM Settings Restore TPM Key CAUTION Ask the customer to enter System Manager ID and System Manager PIN whe...

Page 462: ...ing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB flash drive 4 Restore the backup data b When the error code has been changed to another one see the remedy for the corresponding code Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjustment Main Controller System and Appendix Backup Data List in the Service Manual E748 2011 00 Flash PCB error Detection Description OS was not found...

Page 463: ... error was detected in the Main Controller PCB Remedy Check replace the Main Controller PCB UN81 E804 0000 00 Power Supply Cooling Fan error Detection Description It was detected that the Power Supply Cooling Fan was locked Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the Low voltage Power Supply PCB UN01 J323 and the Power Supply Cooling Fan FM05 J5215 Power Supply Cooling Fan FM05 Low voltage Powe...

Page 464: ...e the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E806 0301 05 Delivery Cooling Fan error Detection Description The Delivery Cooling Fan rotated for more than the specified period of time after the stop of drive Remedy Related parts R1 00 Harness between the DC Controller ...

Page 465: ...able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E880 0001 00 Controller Cooling Fan error Detection Description It was detected that the Controller Cooling Fan was locked Remedy Related parts R1 00 Controller Cooling Fan Main Controller PCB UN81 Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts E880 0003 00 Cont...

Page 466: ...ng sequence jam log Printer Detection Description Error for collecting jam log Printer Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and contact the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW JM ERR D to 1 it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence E996 0CA4 05 Error for collecting sequence jam log Printer Detection Description Error for collecting jam log Printer R...

Page 467: ...n Description Error for collecting jam log Finisher Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and contact to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW JM ERR D to 1 it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence 7 Error Jam Alarm 456 ...

Page 468: ...ure of a drive motor or soiling pa per dust deterioration failure of a drive roller Power on A power on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power on Remaining paper in the machine Soiling on the target sensor Failure of the target sensor Foreign matter on the target sensor paper dust paper lint Error avoidance An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine excluding parts fai...

Page 469: ...Host Machine Cassette PS12 PS11 PS01 PS04 PS05 PS14 PS10 PS101 7 Error Jam Alarm 458 ...

Page 470: ...ELAY Cassette 3 Pullout Sensor PS102 00 0104 DELAY Cassette 4 Pullout Sensor PS103 00 0105 DELAY Pre Registration Sensor PS4 00 0106 DELAY Delivery Sensor PS12 00 0107 DELAY Duplex Sensor PS1 00 0190 DELAY 00 0191 OTHER Multi purpose Tray HP Sensor PS10 00 0202 STNRY Cassette 2 Pullout Sensor PS101 00 0203 STNRY Cassette 3 Pullout Sensor PS102 7 Error Jam Alarm 459 ...

Page 471: ...F SEQUENCE Sequence Jam 00 0CC1 SEQUENCE Sequence Jam 00 0CC2 SEQUENCE Sequence Jam 00 0CC3 SEQUENCE Sequence Jam 00 0CC5 SEQUENCE Sequence Jam 00 0CC6 SEQUENCE Sequence Jam 00 0CF1 ERROR Error avoidance jam 00 0CF2 SEQUENCE Sequence Jam 00 0D91 SIZE ERR Size Error 00 AA01 P STOP Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode 00 AA02 P STOP Jam upon executing paper feed stop mode 00 AA03 P STOP Jam upon ...

Page 472: ...2 LED_DS LED_EXIT M4100 SR3 SR4 Motion Sensor Wi Fi ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 01 0001 DELAY Registration Sensor REG 01 0002 STNRY Registration Sensor REG 01 0009 DELAY Document End Sensor SR4206 01 0010 STNRY Document End Sensor SR4206 7 Error Jam Alarm 461 ...

Page 473: ...091 DOOR OP ADF Open Closed Sensor SR4 01 0092 DOOR OP ADF Cover Sensor SR5 01 0093 DOOR OP ADF Cover Sensor SR5 01 0094 OTHER 01 0095 OTHER 01 0096 OTHER 01 00A1 POWER ON Registration Sensor REG 01 00A4 POWER ON Document End Sensor SR4206 01 00A6 POWER ON Delivery Sensor SR2 Staple Finisher S2 S11 S14 S1 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 02 1001 DELAY Buffer Sensor S1 02 1004 DELAY Feed ...

Page 474: ...m 02 1F01 OTHER Buffer Sensor S1 02 2F30 ERROR Front Alignment Motor 02 2F31 ERROR Staple Motor 02 2F37 ERROR Rear Alignment Motor 02 2F40 ERROR Stack Tray Shift Motor 02 2F75 ERROR Gripper Motor 02 2F77 ERROR Paddle Motor 02 2F83 ERROR Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor 7 Error Jam Alarm 463 ...

Page 475: ...eason Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW 04 0001 Cassette 1 Lifter error A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause Error in Lift Motor or Lifter Sensor Measures 1 While Cassette 1 is removed turn ON the power and then insert Cassette 1 When there is operation sound of the motor 1 1 Check the harness connector between the DC Controller and the Cassette 1 Lifter S...

Page 476: ...ensor by approx 1 5 mm with Plastic Film etc 4 1 Check the condition of the gear at the host machine side to see if there is missing or swing with the gear 5 1 Replace the Cassette 3 Lifter Sensor 6 1 Replace the DC Controller PCB When there is no operation sound of the motor 1 2 Check the harness connector between the DC Controller and the Cassette 3 Lifter Motor 2 2 Check conduction of the fuse ...

Page 477: ...ures Check the Cassette 1 Pickup and Feed and Separation Rollers Check whether a scrap of paper remains around the paper feed area or not 04 0012 Cassette 2 paper feed retry error A Operation B Cause C Remedy Movement Nothing in particular Cause The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out 4 times Measures Check the Cassette 2 Pickup and Feed and Separation Ro...

Page 478: ... Toner Low Cyan alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Low toner was detected and UGW generated an alarm Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW 10 0003 Toner Low Magenta alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy Low toner was detected and UGW generated an alarm Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW 10 0004 Toner Low Yellow alarm A...

Page 479: ...nector Y UN38 5 Replace the Toner Bottle Y 10 0092 Toner memory detection alarm M A Operation B Cause C Remedy Cause Memory of toner M could not be detected 1 Remove and then install the Toner Bottle M 2 Check for any scar or soiling on the memory area of the Toner Bottle M 3 Check the connector between the Toner Log Connector M UN39 and the DC Controller PCB 4 Check for any soiling or damage on t...

Page 480: ...asures Replace the Waste Toner Container 11 0010 Display of Waste Toner Container preparation warning A Operation B Cause C Remedy Movement A message is displayed on the Control Panel Continuous printing is enabled Cause Display of Waste Toner Box preparation warning 13 0001 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0002 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0003 For R D A Operation B Cause C Reme...

Page 481: ...13 0012 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0013 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0014 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0015 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0016 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0017 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0018 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 0019 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 13 001A For R D A Operation B Cause C Re...

Page 482: ...e at primary transfer ATVC control for magenta A Operation B Cause C Remedy 30 0027 Tried to apply abnormally great primary transfer voltage at primary transfer ATVC control for cyan A Operation B Cause C Remedy 30 0028 Tried to apply abnormally great primary transfer voltage at primary transfer ATVC control for black A Operation B Cause C Remedy 30 0032 Error in secondary transfer ATVC below the ...

Page 483: ...such as a change in the configuration of the Fax Board a change in the configuration of the Voice Board or a change in the configuration of the option HDD which requires turning OFF and then ON the power was detected Detection condition timing At the time of startup only Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the main power 31 0020 The configuration of an option controlled by the RCON has been changed A Oper...

Page 484: ...edy It is notified that the value of COPIER COUNTER LF Y DRM LF has reached the value set in COPIER OPTION FNC SW D DLV Y 40 0071 Drum Unit M life value reaching alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy It is notified that the value of COPIER COUNTER LF M DRM LF has reached the value set in COPIER OPTION FNC SW D DLV M 40 0072 Drum Unit C life value reaching alarm A Operation B Cause C Remedy It is noti...

Page 485: ...ration failure A Operation B Cause C Remedy Movement Nothing in particular Cause Condition unable to separate 1st sheet of original from the ADF occurs 3 times Measures Check the rotation of the Delivery Reversal Motor M12 Check the operation of the Pickup Solenoid SL5 Check the life of the Pickup and Feed Rollers and Separation Pad Check if the paper lint is at the pickup slot 61 0001 No staple A...

Page 486: ...73 0017 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0024 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 73 0026 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 76 0003 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 76 0005 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 76 0007 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 77 0001 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 77 0002 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 77 0003 For R D A Operation B Cause C Re...

Page 487: ...79 0001 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 79 0002 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 79 0003 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 79 0004 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0001 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0003 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0004 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0007 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 80 0008 For R D A Operation B Cause C Re...

Page 488: ...on B Cause C Remedy 81 0001 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 81 0003 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 81 0004 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 81 0005 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 81 0006 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 81 0007 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 83 0005 CanonPDF A Operation B Cause C Remedy PDF memory full 83 0015 CanonPDF A Operation B Cause C Remedy PD...

Page 489: ...istration Function Settings Printer Printer Settings Settings Printer Operation Mode and send the data 83 0023 Reception of N201 unanalyzable data A Operation B Cause C Remedy Since PDL automatic judgment may be wrong select the appropriate PDL in Settings Registration Function Settings Printer Printer Settings Settings Printer Operation Mode and send the data 84 0001 For R D A Operation B Cause C...

Page 490: ...85 0005 For R D A Operation B Cause C Remedy 7 Error Jam Alarm 479 ...

Page 491: ...Service Mode 8 Overview 481 COPIER Service mode for copier 497 FEEDER ADF service mode 854 SORTER Service mode for delivery options 858 BOARD Option board setting mode 859 ...

Page 492: ...Press the button to display the initial screen of each mode The differences between these modes are described below Top screen MODELIST In this mode functions for referring to each item in service mode etc are available Updater This button is used to access the CDS and UGW servers and update system software BACKUP This button is used to back up the service mode setting values RESTORE This button i...

Page 493: ...played Operation Check of Electrical Components In situation mode of service mode among electrical components used motors fans solenoids and clutches operation of those that can operate alone can be checked on the Parts Check screen NOTE The service mode used below utilizes the system where electrical components used are operated by control signals sent from the DC Controller If a control signal i...

Page 494: ...ed device whose operation can be checked is displayed 4 Select the electrical component you want to operate and then press the Start button to send a signal for driving the selected electrical component for a specified period of time from the DC Controller 5 ACTIVE is displayed while the electrical component is driven After the electrical component has been driven for a specified period of time OK...

Page 495: ... i Press the button to display the screen showing the locations of electrical components 8 Service Mode 484 ...

Page 496: ...f service mode the searchability of an electrical component has been improved Moreover the signal input output I O state of the electrical components sensors motors fans etc in use can be checked on the screen 1 Start service mode 2 Select SITUATION 3 On the SITUATION MODE screen select Sensor Check 8 Service Mode 485 ...

Page 497: ...nsor of the host machine press the button red dotted frame at COPIER P SENSOR Electrical parts classification Device classification 5 A list of electrical component types for the selected device is displayed 6 Select an electrical component to display the details in the frame red dotted frame at the bottom of the screen 8 Service Mode 486 ...

Page 498: ...an CAUTION This setting is enabled without restarting the host machine After setting the password the following screen will be displayed by accessing service mode Therefore when the PSWD SW is set to 2 system administrator service technician enter the system administrator password System Manager ID and System Manager PIN in Settings Registrations Management Settings User Management System Manager ...

Page 499: ...play Level 1 2 Switching of screens between Level 1 and Level 2 becomes easier By pressing LEVEL 1 at the upper right of the screen while Level 1 screen is displayed the screen is switched to Level 2 screen Service Mode Backup Adjustment is made to every machine at the time of shipment to write the adjustment value in the service label When replacing the DC Controller PCB or clearing RAM the adjus...

Page 500: ... of no papers NOTE Service print data cannot be output when an error has occurred When connecting USB devices that run on external power turn on the power before starting the host machine USB devices connected after the host machine was started will not be recognized Service Print and Data File Name Supported for File Output Service Mode Description P PRINT Output of service mode setting values HI...

Page 501: ...7 537 2 537 86 3 Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port 4 Select service mode Copier Function MISC P RPT2USB and then press OK 3 3 86 357 537 OK 537 86 NOTE If the downloaded file is opened as plain text the paragraphs are misaligned which makes it difficult to read the data When the file is dragged to WordPad an image similar to the image output on paper may be displayed in some ca...

Page 502: ...xecute Download mode 5 Download File 4 ServicePrint Download RZQORDG LOH 0HQX 86 68 2 RZQORDG 6HUYLFH3ULQW RZQORDG 5HWXUQ WR 0DLQ 0HQX 5HVHW 6WDUW VKXWGRZQ VHTXHQFH KDV EHHQ VHOHFWHG HFXWH 2 1 Q RWKHU NH V NOTE If the downloaded file is opened as plain text the paragraphs are misaligned which makes it difficult to read the data When the file is dragged to WordPad an image similar to the image outp...

Page 503: ...llowing shows an example case of SST Ver 4 74 1 Start up the SST 2 Select the model 1 and the type of system software 2 Single then check the network settings and click START 1 2 3 Click Upload Data 4 Select P PRINT RPT txt and click Start 8 Service Mode 492 ...

Page 504: ...e following three points are made available depending on each situation 1 Display of related service mode that needs adjustment 2 Display of causes and remedies 3 Display of related images Function to Mask the Screen during Remote Access This function ensures security during servicing work using remote connection The machine has an option called Remote Operation Viewer for remote control via a net...

Page 505: ...ction has been added to display a message on the Control Panel screen when the machine is being operated remotely using Remote Operation Viewer in order to prevent the user from performing unexpected operations As shown in the figure below the mask screen is displayed when this function is enabled Canon Remote Operation Viewer screen Operation Panel The mask screen is displayed on the Control Pane...

Page 506: ...ice mode is forcibly exited and the previous screen is displayed However the service mode is not forcibly terminated if the Updater screen has been accessed from service mode When this function is enabled all operations operations from the Touch Panel or hardware keys other than screen brightness adjustment and operation on the Energy Saver key are disabled Procedure for Enabling This Function The...

Page 507: ...e service mode press LUI MASK and check that the button is disabled has turned gray Exit the Remote Operation Viewer Disconnect the network disconnect the network cable disable the network function etc Shut down or restart the machine 8 Service Mode 496 ...

Page 508: ... A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ECO ID 2 Display of ECO ID code Detail To display the ECO ID code Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range ASCII character string 12 digits SORTER 1 Dspl of FIN CONT Main firmware version Detail To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB Main Use Case When upgrading the fi...

Page 509: ...00 01 to 99 99 LANG DA 2 Display of Danish language file version Detail To display the version of Danish language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG EL 2 Display of Greek language file version Detail To display the version of Greek language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A D...

Page 510: ...01 to 99 99 LANG PL 2 Display of Polish language file version Detail To display the version of Polish language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG PT 2 Display of Portuguese language file ver Detail To display the version of Portuguese language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N ...

Page 511: ... Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG RM 2 Display of Romanian language file ver Detail To display the version of Romanian language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG SK 2 Display of Slovak language file version Detail To display the version of Slovak language file Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate...

Page 512: ... 99 99 MEDIA DE 2 Dspl of German media information version Detail To display the version of German media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA IT 2 Dspl of Italian media information ver Detail To display the version of Italian media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N...

Page 513: ... to 99 99 MEDIA ET 2 Dspl of Estonian media information ver Detail To display the version of Estonian media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA FI 2 Dspl of Finnish media information ver Detail To display the version of Finnish media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Metho...

Page 514: ...o 99 99 MEDIA SL 2 Dspl of Slovenian media information ver Detail To display the version of Slovenian media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 MEDIA SV 2 Dspl of Swedish media information ver Detail To display the version of Swedish media information Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Metho...

Page 515: ...AX PCB Nothing is displayed if the PCB is not connected Use Case When checking the version Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range ASCII character string 21 digits IOCS 1 Display of BIOS version Detail To display the BIOS version Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 S LNG JP 1 Dspl of service mode Ja...

Page 516: ...pli French file version Detail To display the French language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY IT 1 Dspl of COPY appli Italian file version Detail To display the Italian language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate ...

Page 517: ...o 99 99 COPY EL 2 Dspl of COPY appli Greek file version Detail To display the Greek language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY ET 2 Dspl of COPY appli Estonian file version Detail To display the Estonian language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrad...

Page 518: ... COPY SL 2 Dspl of COPY appli Slovenian file ver Detail To display the Slovenian language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY SV 2 Dspl of COPY appli Swedish file version Detail To display the Swedish language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading t...

Page 519: ... 00 01 to 99 99 COPY TH 2 Dspl of COPY appli Thai file version Detail To display the Thai language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY VN 2 Dspl of COPY appli Vietnamese file ver Detail To display the Vietnamese language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use Case When ...

Page 520: ... 99 SEND FR 1 Dspl of SEND appli French file version Detail To display the French language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND IT 1 Dspl of SEND appli Italian file version Detail To display the Italian language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading ...

Page 521: ...99 99 SEND EL 2 Dspl of SEND appli Greek file version Detail To display the Greek language file version of the SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND ET 2 Dspl of SEND appli Estonian file version Detail To display the Estonian language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgr...

Page 522: ... SEND SL 2 Dspl of SEND appli Slovenian file ver Detail To display the Slovenian language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND SV 2 Dspl of SEND appli Swedish file version Detail To display the Swedish language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading t...

Page 523: ... 00 01 to 99 99 SEND TH 2 Dspl of SEND appli Thai file version Detail To display the Thai language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND VN 2 Dspl of SEND appli Vietnamese file ver Detail To display the Vietnamese language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use Case When ...

Page 524: ...il To display the version of French language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO IT 1 Dspl useful feat intro Italian file ver Detail To display the version of Italian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case When upgrading the firmware...

Page 525: ... EL 2 Dspl of useful feat intro Greek file ver Detail To display the version of Greek language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO ET 2 Dspl useful feat intro Estonian file ver Detail To display the version of Estonian language file of Introduction to Useful Featu...

Page 526: ...Dspl usful feat intro Slovenian file ver Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO SV 2 Dspl useful feat intro Swedish file ver Detail To display the version of Swedish language file of Introduction to Useful Features ...

Page 527: ...TRO TH 2 Dspl useful feat intro Thai file version Detail To display the version of Thai language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 INTRO VN 2 Useful feat intro Vietnamese file ver Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file of Introduction to Useful Feat...

Page 528: ...99 CSTMN FR 1 Dspl of custom menu French file version Detail To display the version of French language file for custom menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN IT 1 Dspl of custom menu Italian file version Detail To display the version of Italian language file for custom menu application Use Case When u...

Page 529: ...99 99 CSTMN EL 2 Dspl of custom menu Greek file version Detail To display the version of Greek language file for custom menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN ET 2 Dspl of custom menu Estonian file ver Detail To display the version of Estonian language file for custom menu application Use Case When up...

Page 530: ...CSTMN SL 2 Dspl of custom menu Slovenian file ver Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for custom menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN SV 2 Dspl of custom menu Swedish file version Detail To display the version of Swedish language file for custom menu application Use Case When up...

Page 531: ...1 to 99 99 CSTMN TH 2 Dspl of custom menu Thai file version Detail To display the version of Thai language file for custom menu application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN VN 2 Dspl of custom menu Vietnamese file ver Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for custom menu application Use Case ...

Page 532: ...1 Dspl of accessibility French file ver Detail To display the version of French language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT IT 1 Dspl of accessibility Italian file ver Detail To display the version of Italian language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the...

Page 533: ...9 ACSBT EL 2 Dspl of accessibility Greek file version Detail To display the version of Greek language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT ET 2 Dspl of accessibility Estonian file ver Detail To display the version of Estonian language file for Accessibility application Use Case Whe...

Page 534: ...T SL 2 Dspl of accessibility Slovenian file ver Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT SV 2 Dspl of accessibility Swedish file ver Detail To display the version of Swedish language file for Accessibility application Use Case When up...

Page 535: ... to 99 99 ACSBT TH 2 Dspl of accessibility Thai file version Detail To display the version of Thai language file for Accessibility application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT VN 2 Dspl accessibility Vietnamese file ver Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for Accessibility application Use C...

Page 536: ...et Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 ERS FR 1 Display of ERS French file version Detail To display the version of French language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS IT 1 Display of ERS Italian file version Detail To...

Page 537: ...m ERS CS 2 Display of ERS Czech file version Detail To display the version of Czech language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS DA 2 Display of ERS Danish file version Detail To display the version of Danish language file for ERS application Use Case...

Page 538: ...y of ERS Norwegian file version Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS PL 2 Display of ERS Polish file version Detail To display the version of Polish language file for ERS application Use Case When upg...

Page 539: ...lay of ERS Bulgarian file version Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS CR 2 Display of ERS Croatian file version Detail To display the version of Croatian language file for ERS application Use Case Wh...

Page 540: ...ERS Vietnamese file version Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS AR 2 Display of ERS Arabic file version Detail To display the version of Arabic language file for ERS application Use Case When upgrad...

Page 541: ...ail To display the serial number written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit Use Case When checking the serial number written in EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit Adj Set Operate Method N A display only Display Adj Set Range 00000001 to 99999999 BCT 1 Display of self diagnosis tool version Detail To display the version of self diagnosis tool Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A D...

Page 542: ...9 BOX TW 2 Dspl of BOX appli Chinese file ver trad Detail To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX KO 2 Display of BOX appli Korean file version Detail To display the version of Korean language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case...

Page 543: ...X NO 2 Dspl of BOX appli Norwegian file version Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX PL 2 Display of BOX appli Polish file version Detail To display the version of Polish language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgradi...

Page 544: ...to 99 99 BOX RM 2 Dspl of BOX appli Romanian file version Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX SK 2 Display of BOX appli Slovak file version Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case Whe...

Page 545: ...1 to 99 99 HOLD AP 1 Display of job hold application version Detail To display the version of the job hold application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 HOLD FR 1 Dspl of job hold French file version Detail To display the French language file version of job hold application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the f...

Page 546: ... 99 99 HOLD DA 2 Dspl of job hold Danish file version Detail To display the Danish language file version of job hold application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 HOLD EL 2 Dspl of job hold Greek file version Detail To display the Greek language file version of job hold application JAVA UI Use Case When upgradi...

Page 547: ...D RU 2 Dspl of job hold Russian file version Detail To display the Russian language file version of job hold application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 HOLD SL 2 Dspl of job hold Slovenian file version Detail To display the Slovenian language file version of job hold application JAVA UI Use Case When upgradi...

Page 548: ...D CA 2 Dspl of job hold Catalan file version Detail To display the Catalan language file version of job hold application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 HOLD TH 2 Dspl of job hold Thai file version Detail To display the Thai language file version of job hold application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the fir...

Page 549: ...ate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX EU 2 Dspl of BOX appli Euskera file ver Detail To display the version of Euskera language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG AR 2 Dspl of Arabic language file ver Detail To display the version of Arabic language fi...

Page 550: ... RPTL FI 2 Dspl RUI Portal Finnish file version Detail To display the version of Finnish language file for Remote UI Portal Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 RPTL HU 2 Dspl RUI Portal Hungarian file version Detail To display the version of Hungarian language file for Remote UI Portal Use Case When upgrading the firmwar...

Page 551: ...9 99 RPTL ID 2 Dspl RUI Portal Indonesian file version Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file for Remote UI Portal Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 RPTL BU 2 Dspl RUI Portal Bulgarian file version Detail To display the version of Bulgarian language file for Remote UI Portal Use Case When upgrading t...

Page 552: ...t Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 CONT PF 1 Display of Controller firmware version Detail To display the platform version of the controller Use Case When checking the platform version at upgrade problem occurrence Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 00 to 99 99 PPA AR 2 Dspl of PPA appli Arabic file version Detail To display the ver...

Page 553: ...o 99 99 Supplement Memo PPA Personal Print Application A function to hold print job It contains the function of secured print PPA DA 2 Dspl of PPA appli Danish file version Detail To display the version of Danish language file for PPA application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 00 to 99...

Page 554: ... 99 99 Supplement Memo PPA Personal Print Application A function to hold print job It contains the function of secured print PPA FI 2 Dspl of PPA appli Finnish file version Detail To display the version of Finnish language file for PPA application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 00 to 9...

Page 555: ...o 99 99 Supplement Memo PPA Personal Print Application A function to hold print job It contains the function of secured print PPA IT 1 Dspl of PPA appli Italian file version Detail To display the version of Italian language file for PPA application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 00 to ...

Page 556: ...9 Supplement Memo PPA Personal Print Application A function to hold print job It contains the function of secured print PPA NO 2 Dspl of PPA appli Norwegian file version Detail To display the version of Norwegian language file for PPA application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 00 to 99...

Page 557: ...o 99 99 Supplement Memo PPA Personal Print Application A function to hold print job It contains the function of secured print PPA SL 2 Dspl of PPA appli Slovenian file version Detail To display the version of Slovenian language file for PPA application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 00...

Page 558: ...s found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 00 to 99 99 Supplement Memo PPA Personal Print Application A function to hold print job It contains the function of secured print PPA ZH 2 Dspl of PPA appli Chinese file ver smpl Detail To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for PPA application JAVA UI is displayed when...

Page 559: ...bile appli Danish file version Detail To display the version of Danish language file for mobile application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 DEA DE 2 Dspl of mobile appli German file version Detail To display the version of German language file for mobile application JAVA UI ...

Page 560: ...obile appli French file version Detail To display the version of French language file for mobile application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 DEA HE 2 Dspl of mobile appli Hebrew file version Detail To display the version of Hebrew language file for mobile application JAVA UI...

Page 561: ...f mobile appli Lithuanian file ver Detail To display the version of Lithuanian language file for mobile application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 DEA LV 2 Dspl of mobile appli Latvian file ver Detail To display the version of Latvian language file for mobile application JA...

Page 562: ...obile appli Romanian file version Detail To display the version of Romanian language file for mobile application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 DEA RU 2 Dspl mobile appli Russian file version Detail To display the version of Russian language file for mobile application JAVA...

Page 563: ...traditional Chinese language file for mobile application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 DEA VN 2 Dspl of mobile appli Vietnamese file ver Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for mobile application JAVA UI is displayed when no file is found Use Case Whe...

Page 564: ...99 99 Supplement Memo Status monitor application An application to display a screen when the Status Monitor Cancel key is pressed SYSMO CS 2 Dspl status mon appli Czech file version Detail To display the version of Czech language file for status monitor application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement M...

Page 565: ...9 99 Supplement Memo Status monitor application An application to display a screen when the Status Monitor Cancel key is pressed SYSMO EU 2 Dspl status mon appli Euskera file ver Detail To display the version of Euskera language file for status monitor application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Me...

Page 566: ...99 Supplement Memo Status monitor application An application to display a screen when the Status Monitor Cancel key is pressed SYSMO ID 2 Dspl sta mon appli Indonesian file ver Detail To display the version of Indonesian language file for status monitor application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement M...

Page 567: ...9 Supplement Memo Status monitor application An application to display a screen when the Status Monitor Cancel key is pressed SYSMO NL 2 Dspl status mon appli Dutch file version Detail To display the version of Dutch language file for status monitor application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo ...

Page 568: ...9 Supplement Memo Status monitor application An application to display a screen when the Status Monitor Cancel key is pressed SYSMO SK 2 Dspl status mon appli Slovak file ver Detail To display the version of Slovak language file for status monitor application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo St...

Page 569: ...rate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement Memo Status monitor application An application to display a screen when the Status Monitor Cancel key is pressed SYSMO VN 2 Dspl sta mon appli Vietnamese file ver Detail To display the version of Vietnamese language file for status monitor application JAVA UI Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj Set Operate Method N A...

Page 570: ...rd Reader Detail To display the connecting state of Card Reader Use Case When checking the connection between the machine and the Card Reader Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 No card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected Copy is not available 1 Card Reader is not connected or card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected Copy is available RAM 1 ...

Page 571: ...CB Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Unit MB Amount of Change per Unit 1 ANALOG COPIER Service mode for copier DISPLAY State display mode ANALOG TEMP 1 Display of outside temperature Detail To display the temperature outside the machine This is measured by the Environment Sensor 2 that detects the outside air Use Case When checking the temperature outside the machine Adj Set Operate Method N...

Page 572: ... the front edge temperature of the Fixing Heater Sub detected by the Sub Thermistor Front Use Case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Heater Sub Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 300 Unit deg C Amount of Change per Unit 1 TEMP2 1 Display of inside temperature Detail To display the estimated temperature inside the machine that is calculated from the ou...

Page 573: ... range 50 to 700 clear the log information for the appropriate control COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR 1TR CLR If the two values are both small the Primary Transfer Roller may have reached the end of life Use Case When estimating the life of Primary Transfer Roller based on the displayed value Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 900 Unit uA Appropriate Target Value 50 700 Rela...

Page 574: ...problem in the result of the control 3 values are displayed in ascending order As the usage of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is extended the value decreases Use Case When identifying the cause at the occurrence of an image failure Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Unit uA Appropriate Target Value 50 700 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR 2TR CLR...

Page 575: ...canned image failure Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2047 Appropriate Target Value 512 2047 DPOT COPIER Service mode for copier DISPLAY State display mode DPOT 2TR PPR 2 For R D 2TR BASE 2 For R D 1TR DC Y 2 For R D 1TR DC M 2 For R D 1TR DC C 2 For R D 1TR DC K 2 For R D LPWR Y 2 For R D LPWR M 2 For R D LPWR C 2 For R D LPWR K 2 For R D DENS COPIER Service mode...

Page 576: ...y TD ratio of Bk color developer density in percentage Use Case When analyzing the cause of image failure density failure fogging and occurrence of E020 Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 7 to 7 Unit Appropriate Target Value 4 5 3 5 Related Service Mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS SGNL K Amount of Change per Unit 1 DENS S Y 2 Dspl differ from Y patch density tgt VL Detail To dis...

Page 577: ...Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Appropriate Target Value 450 640 D M TRGT 2 Dspl of ATR ctrl M patch target density Detail To display the target density for M patch image created by ATR control Use Case When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 65535 Appropriate Target Value 450 640 D C TRGT 2 Dspl of A...

Page 578: ...ccurs due to carrier adherence When fogging appears When fogging is deteriorated Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 1000 to 0 Unit V Appropriate Target Value 570 450 Amount of Change per Unit 1 DEV DC M 2 Dspl of developing DC voltage M Detail To display the latest M developing DC voltage Vdc Use Case When image failure occurs due to carrier adherence When fogging appear...

Page 579: ...M 2 Dspl of primary charging DC voltage M Detail To display the latest primary charging DC voltage of M color Use Case When low density or fogging occurs Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 1500 to 0 Unit V Appropriate Target Value 1400 1200 Amount of Change per Unit 1 CHG DC C 2 Dspl of primary charging DC voltage C Detail To display the latest primary charging DC voltag...

Page 580: ...sity or fogging deterioration use this mode to check whether there is a problem in the Patch Sensor Use Case At low density or fogging deterioration Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 50 150 P B P Y 2 ITB rear base intensity Pwave ATR ctrl Detail To display the ITB background light intensity P wave detected by the Registration Patch Sen...

Page 581: ...lay the Y M color dark current S wave detected by the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Rear at ATR control At low density or fogging deterioration use this mode to check whether there is a problem in the Patch Sensor Use Case At low density or fogging deterioration Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 100 200 P D S C 2 Dspl of ATR ctrl C da...

Page 582: ... Sensor Bk control voltage Detail To display the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor Bk Use Case When checking before clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 Unit V Appropriate Target Value 6 85 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT K Amount of Change per Unit 1 D Y LVL 2 Display of ATR patch form level Y Detail To display the...

Page 583: ...l Adjust Quick Adjust LPOWER M 2 Display of laser power M Detail To display the M laser power at the latest output Use Case When analyzing the cause of image failure low density ghost etc Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 Additional Functions Mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Quick Adjust LPOWER C 2 Display of la...

Page 584: ...olor target VL Detail To display the Y patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Check the Patch Sensor if not corrected Use Case When hue variation occurs Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value...

Page 585: ...ue variation occurs Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 0 700 TGT B C 2 Dspl ARCDAT screen B C color target VL Detail To display the C patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Check the Patc...

Page 586: ... corrected Use Case When hue variation occurs Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value 0 700 TGT C K 2 Dspl of ARCDAT screen C Bk clr target VL Detail To display the Bk patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset th...

Page 587: ... K 2 For R D TGT A Y2 2 Not used TGT A M2 2 Not used TGT A C2 2 Not used TGT A K2 2 Not used TGT B Y2 2 Not used TGT B M2 2 Not used TGT B C2 2 Not used TGT B K2 2 Not used TGT C Y2 2 Not used TGT C M2 2 Not used TGT C C2 2 Not used TGT C K2 2 Not used SUM A Y2 2 For R D SUM A M2 2 For R D SUM A C2 2 For R D SUM A K2 2 For R D SUM B Y2 2 For R D SUM B M2 2 For R D SUM B C2 2 For R D SUM B K2 2 For...

Page 588: ...r R D SGL A K2 2 For R D SGL B Y2 2 For R D SGL B M2 2 For R D SGL B C2 2 For R D SGL B K2 2 For R D SGL C Y2 2 For R D SGL C M2 2 For R D SGL C C2 2 For R D SGL C K2 2 For R D I O I O display mode Host Machine DCON P001 to P011 Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks P001 15 Delivery Sensor PS12 H Paper 14 13 Delivery Paper Full Sensor PS14 H FULL 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 Right Door Open Close Detection ...

Page 589: ...11 H ON 6 Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor PS05 H Paper 5 Pre Registration Sensor PS04 H Paper 4 Multi purpose Tray Paper Sensor PS03 L Paper 3 Multi purpose Tray HP Sensor PS10 H HP 2 1 Duplex Sensor PS01 H Paper 0 P005 15 0 P006 15 0 P007 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 ITB Pressure Release Switch SW07 H OPEN 5 4 3 2 1 0 P008 15 0 P009 15 0 P010 15 0 P011 15 14 8 Service Mode 578 ...

Page 590: ...R CON P005 to P006 Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks P005 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 ADF Open Closed Sensor SR4 L OPEN 1 0 Registration Sensor REG HPaper P006 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Delivery Sensor SR2 HPaper 6 5 ADF Cover Sensor SR5 LOPEN 4 3 2 Document Sensor SR4204 HPaper 1 Document End Sensor SR4206 HPaper 0 CIS HP Sensor SR3 L HP 8 Service Mode 579 ...

Page 591: ...tte 2 Pullout Sensor PS101 H Paper 1 Cassette 2 Paper Surface Sensor PS107 L ON 0 P023 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Cassette Right Door Open Close Detection Switch SW104 L OPEN 1 0 Cassette Feeding Unit AJ1 DCON P022 to P023 Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks P022 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor PS110 L ON 3 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor PS104 L Paper 8 Service Mode 5...

Page 592: ... DCON P022 to P023 Address bit Name Circuit code Remarks P022 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor PS110 L ON 3 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor PS104 L Paper 2 Cassette 2 Pullout Sensor PS101 H Paper 1 Cassette 2 Paper Surface Sensor PS107 L ON 0 P023 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor PS112 L ON 3 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor PS111 L ON 2 Cassette Right Do...

Page 593: ...ing direction at copyboard reading As the value is incremented by 1 the image position is moved to the trailing edge side by 0 1 mm Decrease the value when the non image width is larger than the standard value Increase the value when out of original area is copied When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB enter the value of the service...

Page 594: ...When clearing the Reader related RAM data enter the value of service label As the value is incremented by 1 the reading position moves to the trailing edge side by 0 1 mm Use Case When black lines white lines appear When replacing the Scanner Unit Front When clearing the Reader related RAM data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn...

Page 595: ...PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB enter the value of the service label on the reader Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting value...

Page 596: ...alue of barcode label which is affixed on the glass Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Copyboard Glass Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Disp...

Page 597: ... the Scanner Unit Front enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed ...

Page 598: ...ce label on the reader When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit Front execute DF WLVL1 and DF WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then...

Page 599: ...of the service label on the reader When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit Front execute DF WLVL1 and DF WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting va...

Page 600: ...acing the SATA Flash PCB enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Front enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON th...

Page 601: ...A Flash PCB enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Front enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power ...

Page 602: ...A Flash PCB enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Front enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power ...

Page 603: ...A Flash PCB enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Front enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power ...

Page 604: ... Flash PCB enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Front enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power s...

Page 605: ... Flash PCB enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Front enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power s...

Page 606: ... the SATA Flash PCB enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Back enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Back Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK ...

Page 607: ...nter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2550 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2R2 DFCH2B2 10 DFCH2G2 10 Amount of Change...

Page 608: ...er the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 1 to 2550 Default Value 2000 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2R2 10 DFCH2B2 10 DFCH2G10 Amount of Chan...

Page 609: ... enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Front enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Disp...

Page 610: ... enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Front enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Disp...

Page 611: ... enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Front enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Disp...

Page 612: ...enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Front enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Displ...

Page 613: ...enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Front enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Displ...

Page 614: ...enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Front enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Displ...

Page 615: ...nter the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2550 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH R2 DFCH B2 10 DFCH G2 10 Amount of Change...

Page 616: ...r the value of service label on the Reader Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 1 to 2550 Default Value 2000 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH R2 10 DFCH B2 10 DFCH G10 Amount of Chang...

Page 617: ...d RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Back enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Back Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 T...

Page 618: ...lacing the SATA Flash PCB enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Back enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Back Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the...

Page 619: ...lacing the SATA Flash PCB enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Back enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Back Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the...

Page 620: ...acing the SATA Flash PCB enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Back enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Back Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the ...

Page 621: ...acing the SATA Flash PCB enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Back enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Back Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the ...

Page 622: ...acing the SATA Flash PCB enter the value of the service label on the reader When replacing the Scanner Unit Back enter the value of service label on a new unit Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Back Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the ...

Page 623: ...ader When replacing the Scanner Unit Back execute DF WLVL1 and DF WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Back Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Di...

Page 624: ...label on the reader When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit Front execute DF WLVL1 and DF WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and press O...

Page 625: ...e and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 216 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD CL AGC OFST CL2 1 Adj CIS ch2 offset front clr mode 300dpi Detail To adjust the offset value black level of the Scanner Unit Front on channel 2 in color mode with 300 dpi The value is updated by executing CL AGC Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader relate...

Page 626: ...e and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 216 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD CL AGC OFST2CL0 1 Adj CIS ch0 offset front clr mode 600dpi Detail To adjust the offset value black level of the Scanner Unit Front on channel 0 in color mode with 600 dpi The value is updated by executing CL AGC Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader relate...

Page 627: ...e and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 216 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD CL AGC OFST2CL4 1 Adj CIS ch4 offset front clr mode 600dpi Detail To adjust the offset value black level of the Scanner Unit Front on channel 4 in color mode with 600 dpi The value is updated by executing CL AGC Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader relate...

Page 628: ...dj Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD CL AGC LED CL R 1 Adj pry lgt src lgt time frt clr 300dpi Detail To adjust the lighting time of the LED which is the primary light source of the Scanner Unit Front in color mode with 300 dpi The value is updated by executing CL AGC Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data repl...

Page 629: ...TA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Front Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2928 Default Value 2816 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD CL AGC OFST3CL0 1 Adj CIS ch0 offset back clr mode 300dpi Detail To adjust the offset value black level of the Scanner Unit Back on channel 0 in color mode with 300 dpi The value is update...

Page 630: ...Scanner Unit Back on channel 4 in color mode with 300 dpi The value is updated by executing CL AGC Use Case When replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Back Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 216 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD CL AGC OFST3CL5 1 Adj CIS ch5 offset back clr mode 300dpi Deta...

Page 631: ...Scanner Unit Back on channel 3 in color mode with 600 dpi The value is updated by executing CL AGC Use Case When replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Back Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 255 Default Value 216 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD CL AGC OFST4CL4 1 Adj CIS ch4 offset back clr mode 600dpi Deta...

Page 632: ...ack in color mode with 300 dpi The value is updated by executing CL AGC Use Case When replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Back Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2928 Default Value 1648 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD CL AGC LED3CL2 1 Adj sec lgt src lgt time back clr 300dpi Detail To adjust the lighting...

Page 633: ...perate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit pixel Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 REG H C 1 Ruf adj C clr wrt start pstn horz scan Detail To adjust the write start position of C color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel Use Case When C color displacement in the horizontal sc...

Page 634: ...key Caution Do not use this at the normal service Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit pixel Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 32 REG HS K 1 Adj Bk color write start pstn horz scan Detail To adjust the write start position of black color image in the horizontal scanning direction in smaller increments than 1 pixel Use Case When black color displacement in the horizontal scanning directi...

Page 635: ...e positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit line Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 REG H M 1 Ruf adj M clr wrt start pstn horz scan Detail To adjust the write start position of M color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel Use Case When M color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter ...

Page 636: ...all colors All correction values registered in the media list are proportionally changed Use Case When adjusting the standard magnification ratio due to parts replacement or environmental change etc Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 10 to 10 Unit Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 MAG V 1 Adj of stdrd ma...

Page 637: ... registration As the value is incremented by 1 degree of distortion is changed by 1 micro m with reference to Y color Use Case When distortion occurs in vertical scanning direction Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Output a test print in COPIER TEST PG TYPE 6 Grid 3 Perform visual check and repeat the procedures as needed Display Ad...

Page 638: ...ropriate Target Value 0 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST IMG REG LSR V C1 K1 Amount of Change per Unit 1 LSR V C1 2 Adj C wrt start pstn vert scan 1st sht Detail To adjust the write start position of C color image in vertical scanning direction when color displacement occurs only with the image on the 1st sheet As the value is changed by 1 C color image moves by 1 pixel Move in t...

Page 639: ... 1 degree of distortion is changed by 1 micro m with reference to Y color Use Case When distortion occurs in vertical scanning direction Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Output a test print in COPIER TEST PG TYPE 6 Grid 3 Perform visual check and repeat the procedures as needed Display Adj Set Range 100 to 100 Unit um Default Value...

Page 640: ...eased fogging scattering is alleviated Use Case When an image failure density failure fogging carrier adherence and scattering etc occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display Adj Set Range 5 to 5...

Page 641: ... the value is decreased density is increased but fogging scattering occurs Use Case When an image failure density failure fogging carrier adherence and scattering etc occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support D...

Page 642: ... key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 3 to 3 Unit Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 10 T SPLY C 2 Adjustment of C toner supply amount Detail To adjust the offset value of C toner supply amount When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When E020 occurs frequently Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value ...

Page 643: ...C 2 Adj D max ctrl C color dens target VL Detail An image failure might occur because the density target value of the D max control becomes out of the setting table due to environment change Adjust the offset of the cyan density target value of D max control Use Case When any image failure occurs due to environment change Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by k...

Page 644: ...creased Use Case When density failures fogging etc occur Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Make 10 prints of approx 10 image ratio ex COPIER TEST PG TYPE 16 20 times 3 Execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Caution Execute the Auto Adjust Gradation first to increase the density If you adjust the offset of the target value fogging...

Page 645: ...ng is alleviated Use Case When an image failure density failure fogging carrier adherence and scattering etc occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display Adj Set Range 5 to 5 Unit Default Value 0 ...

Page 646: ...etting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1000 Unit pixel Default Value 59 Amount of Change per Unit 1 BLANK R 1 Adjustment of right edge margin Detail To adjust the margin on the right edge of paper As the value is incremented by 1 the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel 0 0423 mm Use Case When reducing the margin upon user s request When enlarging th...

Page 647: ...Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Density Adjustment Mode Amount of Change per Unit 10 VCONT M 2 Adj of M color contrast potential Detail To adjust the contrast potential for M As the value is incremented by 1 the contrast potential changes by 10V Image becomes darker Image becomes lighter When the value is too large paper winds around the Fixing Roller or a ...

Page 648: ...t Gradation Full Adjust Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Density Adjustment Mode Amount of Change per Unit 10 VCONT K 2 Adj of Bk color contrast potential Detail To adjust the contrast potential for Bk As the value is incremented by 1 the contrast potential changes by 10V Image becomes darker Image becomes lighter When the value is too large paper winds around the Fixing Roller or a tra...

Page 649: ... results by VBACK Y and VBACK2 Y are linked with each other so that their values are the same Amount of Change per Unit 5 VBACK M 2 Adj M clr fog remov potntl pln rcycl 1 2 Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for M color when printing plain paper 1 2 recycled paper 1 2 which paper width is A4 or larger As the value is incremented by 1 the fogging removal potential ch...

Page 650: ...results by VBACK C and VBACK2 C are linked with each other so that their values are the same Amount of Change per Unit 5 VBACK K 2 Adj Bk clr fog remov potntl pln rcycl1 2 Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk color when printing plain paper 1 2 recycled paper 1 2 which paper width is A4 or larger As the value is incremented by 1 the fogging removal potential ch...

Page 651: ... results by VBACK Y and VBACK2 Y are linked with each other so that their values are the same Amount of Change per Unit 5 VBACK2 M 2 Adj M fog remov potntl pln rcycl 3 etc Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for M color when printing plain paper 1 2 recycled paper 1 2 which paper width is smaller than A4 plain paper 3 or recycled paper 3 Fogging is alleviated but whi...

Page 652: ...results by VBACK C and VBACK2 C are linked with each other so that their values are the same Amount of Change per Unit 5 VBACK2 K 2 Adj Bk fog remov potntl pln rcycl 3 etc Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk color when printing plain paper 1 2 recycled paper 1 2 which paper width is smaller than A4 plain paper 3 or recycled paper 3 Fogging is alleviated but wh...

Page 653: ...o Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Color Cast Amount of Change per Unit 5 VBACK3 M 2 Adj M fog remov potntl excpt pln rcycl Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for M color when printing paper other than plain paper 1 2 3 recycled paper 1 2 3 Fogging is alleviated but white black spots are increased due to carrier adhere...

Page 654: ... Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Color Cast Amount of Change per Unit 5 VBACK3 K 2 Adj Bk fog remov potntl excpt pln rcycl Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk color when printing paper other than plain paper 1 2 3 recycled paper 1 2 3 Fogging is alleviated but white black spots are increased due to carrier adher...

Page 655: ...rger the image after adjustment gets darker Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display Adj Set Rang...

Page 656: ...ansfer failure and or a fixing failure occurs Use Case Upon user s request to reduce density difference between devices Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 8 to 8 Default Value 0 ADJ M 1 Adjustment of color balance for M color Detail To adjust the default value of the color balan...

Page 657: ...to Correct Color Mismatch in Settings Registration Use Case When the background of a document cannot be read correctly When removal of the background cannot be performed correctly and a fogging like image appears Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 32 to 32 Default Value 0 OFST M...

Page 658: ...ity Correct Shading and Auto Correct Color Mismatch in Settings Registration Use Case When the background of a document cannot be read correctly When removal of the background cannot be performed correctly and a fogging like image appears Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 32 to...

Page 659: ...ally Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage LD OFS C 2 Adj C low dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the set...

Page 660: ...lly Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage MD OFS Y 2 Adj Y mid dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the s...

Page 661: ...ally Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage MD OFS C 2 Adj C mid dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the ...

Page 662: ...h the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage HD OFS Y 2 Adj Y hi dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the setting value o...

Page 663: ...ally Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage HD OFS C 2 Adj C hi dens area clr balance copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in the main menu to the set...

Page 664: ...btained by adding the value adjusted in Fine Adjust Density in Access Stored Files to the setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value e g When the value of this item is 4 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 1 Note that the density value must be within the rage from 8 to 8 e g When the value of this item is 7 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5...

Page 665: ...tem is applied as the actual density value e g When the value of this item is 4 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 1 Note that the density value must be within the rage from 8 to 8 e g When the value of this item is 7 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 8 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and pres...

Page 666: ...item is applied as the actual density value e g When the value of this item is 4 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 1 Note that the density value must be within the rage from 8 to 8 e g When the value of this item is 7 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 8 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and pre...

Page 667: ...tem is applied as the actual density value e g When the value of this item is 4 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 1 Note that the density value must be within the rage from 8 to 8 e g When the value of this item is 7 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 8 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and pres...

Page 668: ...8 Default Value 0 Additional Functions Mode Access Stored Files Mail Box Print Change Print Settings Options Color Balance Fine Adjust Density HV TR COPIER Service mode for copier ADJUST Adjustment mode HV TR 1TR TGY 2 Y pry trn ATVC tgt crrnt pln rcycl1 2 Detail To adjust the offset of the target current value for Y color upon primary transfer ATVC control for plain paper 1 2 recycled paper 1 2 w...

Page 669: ...urs Decrease the value when image fogging due to transfer memory or drum memory due to strong transfer current occurs Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit uA Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR 1TR TGC3 Supplement Memo...

Page 670: ...ase decrease the value in the 100 to 10 3000 to 300 V range in increments of 10 30 V When the value is decreased too much transfer failure occurs Use Case When similar image failures occur regardless of the conditions Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution The setting is applied to all paper types and both sides of paper When limitin...

Page 671: ...Decrease the value when image fogging due to transfer memory or drum memory due to strong transfer current occurs Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution To reflect the setting immediately execute primary ATVC control Display Adj Se...

Page 672: ... results by 1TR TGY and 1TR TGY3 are linked with each other so that their values are the same Amount of Change per Unit 1 1TR TGM3 2 Adj M pry trn ATVC tgt crrnt pln rcycl 3 Detail To adjust the offset of the target current value for M color upon primary transfer ATVC control for plain paper 1 2 recycled paper 1 2 which paper width is smaller than A4 plain paper 3 or recycled paper 3 Increase the ...

Page 673: ...lts by 1TR TGC and 1TR TGC3 are linked with each other so that their values are the same Amount of Change per Unit 1 1TR TK13 2 Bk m pry trn ATVC tgt crrnt pln rcycl 3 Detail To adjust the offset of the target current value for single Bk color upon primary transfer ATVC control for plain paper 1 2 recycled paper 1 2 which paper width is smaller than A4 plain paper 3 or recycled paper 3 Increase th...

Page 674: ...2 micro A Increase the value if spots white spots leopard pattern image occurs Decrease the value if white spots occur Decrease the value if mottled image due to paper surface nature occurs when paper type is heavy paper 1 2 Use Case When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ...

Page 675: ...ive positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 30 2TR N2 2 1 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V pln2 2nd Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 2nd side of plain paper 2 at secondary transfer ATVC control When mottled image occurs increase the value if it is due to insufficient secondary transfer current and dec...

Page 676: ... positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 30 2TR R1 2 1 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V rcycl1 2nd Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 2nd side of recycled paper 1 at secondary transfer ATVC control When mottled image occurs increase the value if it is due to insufficient secondary transfer current and d...

Page 677: ...ative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 30 2TR R3 2 1 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V rcycl3 2nd Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 2nd side of recycled paper 3 at secondary transfer ATVC control When mottled image occurs increase the value if it is due to insufficient secondary transfer current ...

Page 678: ...nd 1st 2nd side Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 30 2TR H2 2 1 Sec trn ATVC ppr allot V heavy 2 3 2nd Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 2nd side of heavy paper 2 3 at secondary transfer ATVC control Use Case When adjusting the sec...

Page 679: ...V Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 30 2TR CP 2 1 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V color 2nd Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 2nd side of color paper at secondary transfer ATVC control When mottled image occurs increase the value if it is due to insufficient secondary transfer current and decrease the value if it is due to overcurrent Use Case When adjusting the seco...

Page 680: ...sitive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 30 2TR NC 1 1 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allotV no crbn 1st Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 1st side of non carbon paper at secondary transfer ATVC control When mottled image occurs increase the value if it is due to insufficient secondary transfer current and decr...

Page 681: ...ive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 30 2TR PA 1 1 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V punch 1st Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 1st side of pre punched paper at secondary transfer ATVC control When mottled image occurs increase the value if it is due to insufficient secondary transfer current and decreas...

Page 682: ...gative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 30 2TR P 1 1 Sec trn ATVC ctrl ppr allot V crd 1st Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage applied to the 1st side of postcard at secondary transfer ATVC control When mottled image occurs increase the value if it is due to insufficient secondary transfer current and decreas...

Page 683: ...e value if density on the leading edge of paper is low transfer is weak Use Case When an image failure white spots at the leading edge occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this item only when an image failure occurs Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Default Value 0 Amount of Ch...

Page 684: ... the value if density on the leading edge of paper is low transfer is weak Use Case When an image failure white spots at the leading edge occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this item only when an image failure occurs Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Default Value 0 Amount of...

Page 685: ...he value if density on the leading edge of paper is low transfer is weak Use Case When an image failure white spots at the leading edge occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this item only when an image failure occurs Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Default Value 0 Amount of C...

Page 686: ...a of the leading edge of paper Use Case When an image failure white spots at the leading edge occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this item only when an image failure occurs Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 2TR TH 1 1 Sec trn ATVC ...

Page 687: ...ots at the leading edge occurs Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Use this item only when an image failure occurs Display Adj Set Range 128 to 127 Unit V Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 30 FEED ADJ COPIER Service mode for copier ADJUST Adjustment mode FEED ADJ REGIST 1 Adj registration start timing PS200 135 Detail To a...

Page 688: ...to the right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If write start position cannot be adjusted in service mode execute mechanica...

Page 689: ...t edge of paper is increased by 0 1 mm Left margin becomes larger An image moves to the right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Cau...

Page 690: ...margin is changed by 0 1 mm Left margin becomes larger An image moves to the right Left margin becomes smaller An image moves to the left When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Ad...

Page 691: ...s speed of 100 mm sec As the value is changed by 1 the leading edge margin is changed by 0 1 mm Leading edge margin becomes larger An image moves to the trailing edge side Leading edge margin becomes smaller An image moves to the leading edge side Use Case When adjusting the leading edge margin Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display ...

Page 692: ...d by 0 1 mm Increase Decrease The setting is applied in case of pickup from a cassette Multi purpose Tray and 1 sided 2 sided printing Use Case When an image at process speed of 135 mm sec is skewed Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 REG SPD 1 Speed adju...

Page 693: ...ading edge side When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data either restore the backup data or enter the value of service label Use Case When adjusting the leading edge margin When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value The value ...

Page 694: ... by 1 the arch amount is changed by 0 1 mm Increase Decrease The setting is applied in case of pickup from a cassette Multi purpose Tray and 1 sided 2 sided printing Use Case When an image at process speed of 100 mm sec is skewed Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 50 to 50 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change pe...

Page 695: ...ing edge margin becomes smaller An image moves to the leading edge side When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data either restore the backup data or enter the value of service label Use Case When adjusting the leading edge margin When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display...

Page 696: ...r levels corresponding to the other scales can be detected almost correctly there is no need to adjust the timing of switching CST VLM2 2 Adj Cassette 2 level detect threshold VL Detail To adjust the timing to switch the scale indicating paper level in the Cassette 2 from 3 to 2 As the value is larger switching of the level display becomes earlier For example if you prefer to switch the scale when...

Page 697: ...vels corresponding to the other scales can be detected almost correctly there is no need to adjust the timing of switching CST VLM4 2 Adj Cassette 4 level detect threshold VL Detail To adjust the timing to switch the scale indicating paper level in the Cassette 4 from 3 to 2 As the value is larger switching of the level display becomes earlier For example if you prefer to switch the scale when pap...

Page 698: ...ment level of B W color original in ACS mode As the value is increased the original tends to be detected as a B W document and as the value is decreased the original tends to be detected as a color document Use Case When adjusting the color detection level in ACS mode Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power swit...

Page 699: ...tends to be detected as a text document Use Case When adjusting the classification level of text and photo in Text Photo Map mode back side at duplex reading with 1 path Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 4 to 4 Default Value 0 K ADJ3 1 Set Bk text jdgmt stdrd back side Detail T...

Page 700: ... As the value is larger the image gets sharper If the value is too large moire is likely to occur in an output image of COPY and SEND To match the image quality with that of the back side in the duplex stream reading mode decrease the value when moire on the front side is stronger than the back side and increase the value when it is weaker Use Case When moire frequently occurs on images of COPY an...

Page 701: ...ated Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW CARD RNG AINR OFF 1 ON OFF warm up rotn deact dor open close Detail To set whether to disable the warm up rotation when opening and closing the door By selecting 1 printing can be executed without auto adjustment at warm up rotation when analyzing the cause of a problem Use Case When printing and checking without auto adjustment at warm up rotation when analy...

Page 702: ...ormation such as the device counter failure and consumables to the sales company s server via SOAP protocol COM LOG 1 Dspl connect error w Sales Co s server Detail To display error information when the connection with the sales company s server failed Use Case When using Embedded RDS Adj Set Operate Method Display only Caution Be sure to use E RDS RGW PORT COM TEST COM LOG and RGW ADR as a set Dis...

Page 703: ... the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 1 to 168 1 week Unit hour Default Value 24 Supplement Memo Embedded RDS Function to send device information such as the device counter failure and consumables to the sales company s server via SOAP protocol Amount of Change per Unit 1 CDS CTL 1 Set country area when using CDS Detail To set country area to enable CDS Use Case When enabling CDS Adj Set Op...

Page 704: ...d Emulation BLE USE 1 ON OFF of BLE module option Detail To set whether to enable the installed BLE module option Set 1 when using the BLE module option The BLE setting screen is displayed in Settings Registration Use Case When installing the BLE module option Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not set 1 when the BL...

Page 705: ...2 DFCH G2 DFCH B2 DFCH K2 DFCH R10 DFCH G10 DFCH B10 DFCH K10 DFCH2R2 DFCH2G2 DFCH2B2 DFCH2K2 DFCH2R10 DFCH2G10 DFCH2B10 DFCH2K10 MTF CLC 1 Deriving of MTF filter coefficient Detail To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the MTF value which has been backed up Use Case When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and the...

Page 706: ...IVE At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD BK SHD1 3 BK SHD3 1 Paper back shading correction 3 Detail To generate the paper back shading correction data by scanning the Standard White Plate of the Paper Back Reading Glass with the Scanner Unit Back Use Case When replacing the SATA Flash PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit Back Adj Set Operate M...

Page 707: ...n inspection mode PANEL LCD CHK 1 Check of LCD Panel dot missing Detail To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the Control Panel Use Case When replacing the LCD Panel Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Check that the LCD Panel lights up in the order of white black red green and blue 3 Press STOP key to terminate checking LED CHK 1 Check of Control...

Page 708: ... the Clutch checking the operation Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Required Time 6 sec Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK CL FAN 1 Specification of operation fan Detail To specify the fan to operate Use Case When replacing the fan checking the operation Adj Set Operate Method E...

Page 709: ...r Detail To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR Motors other than those listed below stop automatically after operation of 30 seconds Bk Drum _ ITB Motor M02 After 10 seconds Fixing Motor M04 After 15 seconds Bottle Motor YM and Bottle Motor CK After supplying 5 blocks of toner Use Case When replacing the Motor checking the operation Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then ...

Page 710: ...ut the service mode setting values by P PRINT before execution After execution enter necessary setting values The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF ON Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT JAM HIST 1 Clear of jam history Detail To clear the jam history Use Case When clearing the jam history Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key ERR H...

Page 711: ...plication other than User Authentication is running it switched to User Authentication after reboot Set the login application using SMS as needed MN CON 1 Deletion of setting values Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To delete the setting values of address lists forwarding settings Settings Registration and service mode For details ...

Page 712: ...of E RDS SRAM data Detail To initialize the SCM value of the Embedded RDS stored in the SRAM SCM values are ON OFF of E RDS server s port number server s SOAP URL and communication schedule with the server how often the data is acquired etc The value set by COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL E RDS RGW PORT RGW ADR COM LOG is cleared Use Case When upgrading the Bootable in the E RDS environment Adj Set Operat...

Page 713: ... remains the same as it was before execution Supplement Memo After the execution language displayed on the screen becomes English Switch the language as needed There are 9 language files JEFIGSCKT installed at the time of shipment FIN MCON 1 Clearing Finisher delvry destination set Detail To clear the setting of Delivery Tray of the Finisher specified in Settings Registration Function Settings Com...

Page 714: ...lications bundled as standard system application built in login application MEAP applications installed additionally non Canon made login application general application etc CUSTOM2 2 For customization MISC R COPIER Service mode for copier FUNCTION Operation inspection mode MISC R SCANLAMP 1 Lighting check of Scanner Unit Frt LED Detail To light up the Scanning Lamp for 3 seconds under the White P...

Page 715: ...ist Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure to use A4 LTR size plain paper recycled paper LBL PRNT 1 Output of service label Detail To print the service label Use Case When printing the service label Adj Set Operate Method 1 Place A4 LTR paper in Cassette 1 2 Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure to use A4 LTR size plain paper recycled paper 1AT...

Page 716: ...tem Monitor Print Log Printer and in the report of the print job history USBH PRT 1 Output of USB device information report Detail To output information of the connected USB device in the form of a report Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Caution Be sure to use A4 LTR size plain paper recycled paper T1 UP 1 Execution of all ITB disengagement mode Detail To disengage the ...

Page 717: ... the main power switch 7 Enter 0 and then press OK key 8 Execute mechanical adjustment using the Adjustment Plate in a cassette to adjust the side registration position of paper 9 Repeat the above procedure as needed Caution Be sure to set A4 paper on the paper source Cassette 1 to 4 Multi purpose Tray specified by FX RGPOS Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P FX RGPOS FX RGPOS 2 Spec ppr s...

Page 718: ...egistration of correction pattern 2 COLR 03 Auto correction color tone settings Registration of correction pattern Registration of correction pattern 3 COLR 04 Auto correction color tone settings Registration of correction pattern Registration of correction pattern 4 COLR 05 Auto correction color tone settings Registration of correction pattern Registration of correction pattern 5 COL Auto correct...

Page 719: ... CHECK 1 Entire HDD check and recovery Detail To check the entire HDD and execute recovery processing Adj Set Operate Method Enter 1 and then press OK key Caution Be sure to execute this item after CHK TYPE Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not executed 1 Executed at next startup Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE HD CLEAR 1 Initialization of specified partition Detail Operation on ...

Page 720: ...CB Use Case When replacing the Main Controller PCB clearing the Reader related RAM data replacing the SATA Flash PCB Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution During operation the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored it is overwritten with ne...

Page 721: ...For R D DEFAULT 2 Reset of debug log setting Detail To clear all debug log settings and return to the state before debug log collection operation Use Case When returning the device in which analyzing the cause of a problem was completed When resetting the debug log settings Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key LOG DEL 2 Clearing of debug logs Detail To delete the debug log ...

Page 722: ...od 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not installed 1 Installed Default Value 0 Printer model 1 Copier model INTROT 1 1 Set ATR ctrl patch density dtct interval Detail To set execution interval of patch density detection executed at ATR control By changing the setting value execution intervals at last rotation and at p...

Page 723: ...t last rotation 2 At paper interval with 1 1 speed and last rotation Default Value 2 BK 4CSW 2 Set simple full clr mode hvy ppr Bk m Detail To set the conditions to switch single Bk color mode to simple full color mode according to the type of heavy paper In single Bk color mode shock image at 75 122 mm from the leading edge is likely to occur due to impact triggered by paper entering the secondar...

Page 724: ...lay Chinese paper K size paper 16K as an original size at the time of copying or scan and store When MODEL SZ is 0 this setting is enabled Use Case When using K size paper Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value It differs according to the location Related Service Mode COPIER OP...

Page 725: ...BCOUNT 2 Scope range set of Charge Counter MIB Detail To set the range of counter information that can be obtained as MIB Management Information Base Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 All charge counters are obtained 1 Only displayed counter is obtained 2 All charge counters are not obtained Cou...

Page 726: ...lue and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Be sure to select 1 or 2 with PSWD SW in advance Display Adj Set Range 1 to 99999999 Default Value 11111111 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW PSWD SW RPT2SIDE 1 Set of report 1 sided 2 sided output Detail To set whether to use 1 sided or 2 sided for report output of service mode Use Case When making 1 sided report output...

Page 727: ...Range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default Value It differs according to the location Supplement Memo CDS Content Delivery System CDS MEAP 1 Set to allow MEAP installation by admin Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set whether to permit the user administrator to install MEAP applications and enable iR options from CDS When 1 is s...

Page 728: ...al rotation is extended and the paper intervals become wider As a result paper curl can be alleviated but productivity decreases Use Case When heavy paper is curled Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that productivity decreases Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 AUTO OUT 1 ON OFF of jamm...

Page 729: ...d with the series occurs Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Do not use setting value 2 and 3 Display Adj Set Range 0 to 3 0 Drawing algorithm of iR ADV C series 1 Drawing algorithm of the conventional iR C series 2 3 For R D use Default Value 0 CDS LVUP 1 Set to allow CDS periodical update ...

Page 730: ...trol execution frequency Detail To set the frequency of D max control that is executed after a specified number of sheets is fed When 0 is set the execution frequency of D max control is decreased by half Use Case When density varies at the time of making a large number of outputs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj...

Page 731: ...rtual Terminal ASCII MIB EXT 1 For R D SVC RUI 1 Enabling of RUI function for servicing Detail To set whether to enable the RUI function for servicing not provided to end users When 0 is set the RUI function is disabled When setting the value other than 0 RUI function is enabled The value entered becomes password to use the RUI function Use Case When preferring to use the import function of backgr...

Page 732: ... setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Main Menu screen 1 Screen registered as the startup screen Default Value 0 NO LGOUT 1 Display hide of logout button Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set whether to display or hide Logout button When 0 is set Logout button is ...

Page 733: ...dj Set Range 50 to 1000 Unit Default Value It differs according to the location Related Service Mode COPIER COUNTER LF K DRM LF Amount of Change per Unit 1 JM ERR D 2 Set of error display of 0CAx jam DCON Detail To set whether to display 0CAx jam as the error E996 0CAx In the case of a jam log cannot be obtained depending on the timing By selecting 1 when the jam 0CAx occurs it is displayed as the...

Page 734: ...the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default Value 1 TNR RS 2 Set of Toner Container rotation speed Detail To set the rotation speed of Toner Container As the value is larger the Toner Container rotates faster so enough amount of toner is supplied for high duty high image ratio image but noise becomes louder Use Case When the rotation drive noise is loud When not enough am...

Page 735: ...and then press OK key Caution Noise becomes louder Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 Automatic 1 Half speed 2 Full speed Default Value 0 Supplement Memo The Power Supply Cooling Fan also cools the Controller PCB DLVY FAN 2 Adj Delivery Cooling Fan airflow amount Detail To set the rotation speed of the Delivery Cooling Fan during printing When 2 is set the heat exhaust efficiency is improved so it can...

Page 736: ...he Main Controller and the version in PCB option after installation replacement is not appropriate operation with the combination of firmware versions has not yet been checked failure where analysis is difficult may occur It is possible to check the firmware versions at the start of the machine and automatically write the firmware stored in the Main Controller in PCB option collectively as needed ...

Page 737: ...tely after near full 1 A 250 sheets B 750 sheets 2 A 500 sheets B 1000 sheets 3 A 750 sheets B 1250 sheets 4 A 1000 sheets B 1500 sheets 5 A 1250 sheets B 1750 sheets 6 A 1500 sheets B 2000 sheets 7 A 1750 sheets B 2250 sheets 8 A 2000 sheets B 2500 sheets Unit sheet Default Value 4 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW WT WARN Amount of Change per Unit 250 DFAN SPD 2 Set paper protrusion pr...

Page 738: ...the first to fifth sheets are output in color mode and the mode shifts to black mode from the sixth sheet 1 Excluding thin paper of 210 mm or more in width 60 to 63 g m2 plain paper 1 64 to 75 g m2 plain paper 2 76 to 90 g m2 recycled paper 1 64 to 75 g m2 recycled paper 2 76 to 90 g m2 color paper 64 to 75 g m2 pre punched paper 64 to 75 g m2 and carbonless paper 60 g m2 the mode shifts to black ...

Page 739: ...ult Value 1 Supplement Memo Finishing job Job that 2 sided print binding and or collate set in Finishing of the printer driver FL START 2 For customization D DLV Y 1 Set Y Drum prior dvry alarm notice tmg Detail To set the timing to notify the prior delivery alarm for the Drum Unit Y Use Case When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the usage status Adj Set Operate Method 1 ...

Page 740: ...nly when using tiered billing a value other than 0 is set for VC CNT and a management application supporting breakdown log of tiered billing counter In other cases wrong values may be collected by a management application which collects job log Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not added 1 Added Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION USER VC CNT 3RDP MSG 2 ON OFF pop up screen dspl after ...

Page 741: ...ings Mail Box UI SEND 2 Display hide of send screen Detail To set whether to display or hide the SEND function Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default Value 1 UI FAX 2 Display hide of FAX screen Detail To set whether to display or hide the FAX functi...

Page 742: ...witch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 Hide all UIs related to secured print 1 Display all UIs related to secured print 2 Hide Secured Print button in the main menu and the simple authentication settings in Settings Registration menu Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION USER LGCY SCP IMGC ADJ 1 ON OFF of img adj item display Set Reg Detail To set whether to display the item relating to...

Page 743: ...he adjustment target selection screen at auto gradation adjustment full adjustment Use Case When executing full adjustment according to the usage status paper type resolution etc Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 OFF 1 Display Thin1 Plain 1 2 Recycled 1 2 and Plain 3 Recycled 3 2 Display Thin1 P...

Page 744: ... OFF of Store Location Display Settings Memory Media in Settings Registration menu respectively The setting is reflected after turning OFF ON the power Use Case When not displaying the memory media screen on the Control Panel Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 Additional ...

Page 745: ...splay Auto Shutdown Time in Settings Registration menu Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When Hide is set auto shutdown time is reset Auto shutdown is not performed Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default Value It differs according to the location Additional Functions Mode Preferences Time Energy Settings Auto Sh...

Page 746: ...r settings screen in Settings Registration menu When 1 is set paper type FOOLSCAP OFFICIO etc can be set on the paper settings screen for each paper source Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value It differs according to the location Additional Functions Mode Preferences Paper Settings Pa...

Page 747: ...n thrshld Detail To set the threshold value for the toner level in the Y M C color Toner Container When the toner level becomes below the threshold value while TNR WARN is 0 a toner level warning message Toner is low Replacement not yet needed is displayed on the Control Panel As the value is incremented by 1 the threshold value is increased by 1 As the value is larger the timing to display the me...

Page 748: ...r e mail or failure in interpretation of the context Selecting 0 prints the header footer in 1 sheet when receiving e mail text without attached file Use Case When preventing endless print in the case of failure in reception Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 999 0 E mail text not printed 999 Unlimit...

Page 749: ... through network use 0 in the normal operation When fixed to 100Base TX 10Base T for any reason change the setting Use Case When fixing the communication speed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 Auto 1 100Base TX 2 10Base T Default Value 0 NS CMD5 2 Limit CRAM MD5 auth method at SMTP auth Detail ...

Page 750: ...ss OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 SMTP server dependent 1 Not used Default Value 0 Supplement Memo SMTP authentication Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP which is the protocol to be used for e mail transmission At the time of e mail transmission this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between...

Page 751: ...h Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 SMTP server dependent 1 Not used Default Value 0 Supplement Memo SMTP authentication Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP which is the protocol to be used for e mail transmission At the time of e mail transmission this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e m...

Page 752: ...ying any number other than 0 header footer is printed forwarded in 1 sheet only if the e mail body text is less than the specified value while no TIFF file is attached As the value is incremented by 1 the number of target characters in e mail body text is increased by 1 character Use Case When reducing print of blank paper due to e mail received by IFAX Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting v...

Page 753: ...ess OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 1 to 2 1 ON 2 OFF Default Value 1 802XTOUT 1 Set of IEEE802 1X authentication timeout Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set timeout value for IEEE802 1X authentication If the device executes 802 1X authentication change the wait time for response from the authe...

Page 754: ... Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 1 Supplement Memo Network Configurator function is a function to be used for communication with NetSpot Device Installer etc and the network setting can be changed from the remote IKEINTVL 1 Setting of IKE retry interval Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set retry interval i...

Page 755: ...ich have no direct relation to the machine are recorded Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Unicast packets to the machine only 1 All packets Default Value 0 ILOGKEEP 1 Set of IP address block log hold time Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set the retention time from the log time of IP block When access is made again from a same IP ...

Page 756: ...e Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution With IPv6 use of MTU which size is less than 1280 bytes is not recommended by RFC Therefore when setting IPv6 to ON and MTU to 7 or smaller communication using IPv6 may not be available Display Adj Set Range 1 to 10 1 600 byte 2 700 byte 9 1400 byte 10 1500 byte Unit byte Default Value 10 Supplement Memo MTU The maximum size of data un...

Page 757: ...xt Generation Network URI Uniform Resource Identifier SIPREGPR 2 Setting of registrar server use protocol Detail To set the protocol used for communication with registrar server Although the protocol that is the same as the one for proxy server is usually used another protocol can be used in accordance with user and environment Use Case Upon user s request to use a protocol different from the one ...

Page 758: ... BIN mode Default Value 0 SSLMODE 2 Setting of HTTP HTTPS port open close Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set whether to open or close HTTP HTTPS port When 1 is set while Use HTTP is ON and SSL Settings is OFF in Settings Registration menu HTTP port is opened whereas HTTPS port is closed When 2 is set while both Use HTTP and S...

Page 759: ...ess OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default Value 1 Additional Functions Mode Preferences Network Wireless Connection Settings WLANPORT 2 Set of port filter at wireless LAN side Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set whether to open all ports at the wireless LAN side Wh...

Page 760: ...ier OPTION Specification setting mode ENV SET ENVP INT 1 Temp humid Fix Roll temp log get cycle Detail To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside the machine or the surface temperature of the Fixing Roller As the value is incremented by 1 the cycle is increased by 1 minute Obtained log can be displayed by selecting the following COPIER DISPLAY ENVRNT Use Case At trouble ...

Page 761: ...r consumption can be reduced however image failure may occur Use Case When an image failure occurs due to lowering of the transfer efficiency Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 10 0 No ITB cleaning Unit sheet Default Value 5 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING TBLT CLN Amount of Change per Unit 1 ITBB TMG 1 Setting of ITB clean...

Page 762: ...he value when fine line displacement occurs on trailing edge of envelope and increase the value when wrinkles occur Use Case When fine line displacement or wrinkles occur on trailing edge while feeding envelope Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Be sure to change the value a little at a time Otherwise fine line displacement wrink...

Page 763: ...When the number of sheets reaches the specified value ARCDAT control is executed by interrupting an ongoing job If the value is too large the density of image becomes different before and after the interruption If the value is too small the productivity is lowered Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 10 to 500 Unit ...

Page 764: ...power switch Caution When increasing the value too much the cleaning instruction screen may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared on the image can be detected When decreasing the value too much black lines may appear Display Adj Set Range 1 to 255 Default Value 200 DF2DSTL1 1 Adj dust dtct level strem ppr int back Detail To adjust dust detection level that is executed in...

Page 765: ...ge the setting if the copy image has a problem with the initial setting Low screen ruling Select 0 error diffusion in the case of moire suitable for character reproduction Select 2 High screen ruling in the case of rough dots Use Case When moire image or rough dots occurs on copy image Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Displa...

Page 766: ... specified compression rate If an image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate processing to prioritize reproduction of text is performed by default Set 1 when an image contains many halftone photo images Set 2 when an image contains many printed photos Use Case When copying an image which contains many halftone dots and photos Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and t...

Page 767: ...nt color balance fine adjustment of density When 0 is set the color adjustment value is reflected to an image precisely but toner scattering in the Transfer Assembly and Fixing Assembly might occur and paper might wind around the Fixing Assembly Use Case Upon user s request When reflecting the color adjustment value to an image precisely Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then pr...

Page 768: ...operation Display Adj Set Range 1 to 3 1 CS680 68g Except for USA and EU Mainly for Japan 2 Canon Multipurpose 20lb 75g For USA 3 Canon Red Label Professional 80g For EU Default Value It differs according to the location AST SEL 2 Adj of advanced smoothing effect Detail To adjust the smoothing effect which is set in the advanced smoothing UI Set 3 if no smoothing effect is obtained even though Hig...

Page 769: ...erate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 OFF 1 ON HH environment only 2 ON all environments Default Value 1 DV RT LG 2 ON OFF of Drum Unit first idle rotation Detail To set ON OFF of idle rotation of the Drum Unit to be performed first time for the day Although idle rotation is not performed in the normal operation to extend the life of Drum Unit ex...

Page 770: ...curs Use Case When an image failure carrier adherence ring marks etc occurs Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Caution If the value is too small the contrast becomes weak Display Adj Set Range 0 to 5 0 0 V 1 100 V 2 200 V 3 300 V 4 400 V 5 500 V Unit V Appropriate Target Value 0 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COP...

Page 771: ... OFF ON the main power switch 3 Execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment Display Adj Set Range 3 to 3 Default Value 0 DMX OF C 2 Adj of C color D max target density Detail To adjust the target density of D max control in the case where density of solid area on C color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation adjustment is executed Increase the value when the density is low and de...

Page 772: ... smaller productivity and toner consumption are improved but coarseness is worsened Use Case While printing low duty low image ratio images When graininess coarseness or decrease in density occurs When low productivity or high toner consumption is pointed out by the user Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Do not use this when the...

Page 773: ... Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 Default Value 1 MG TR COPIER Service mode for copier OPTION Specification setting mode MG TR 2TR RVON 2 Setting of trailing edge weak bias Detail To set the conditions to apply weak bias on the trailing edge of paper When 0 is set weak bias is applied to the trailing edge of paper in single Bk mode When 1...

Page 774: ...e specified value Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs Decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When offset fixing failure occurs on heavy paper 1 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Be sure to change the value a little at a time Otherwise offset image failure occurs wh...

Page 775: ...he value when a fixing failure occurs Decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When offset fixing failure occurs on thin paper Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Be sure to change the value a little at a time Otherwise offset image failure occurs when setting an extreme value Dis...

Page 776: ...leading edge of paper Decrease the value when uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 56 5 mm Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 56 5 mm of heavy paper 2 3 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Be sure to change the value a little at a time Otherwise offset image failure occur...

Page 777: ...by 1 the control temperature is increased by 5 deg C from the specified value Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper Decrease the value when uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 56 5 mm Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 56 5 mm of envelope Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2...

Page 778: ...d the life of Fixing Assembly However setting of 1 does not mean that the life of Fixing Assembly is always extended Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When 1 is set FCOT FPOT is reduced Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default Value 0 TMP TBL7 1 Fixing control temperature Plain paper 2 Detail To set the offset ...

Page 779: ...en uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 56 5 mm Use Case When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 56 5 mm of plain paper 2 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Be sure to change the value a little at a time Otherwise offset image failure occurs when setting an extreme value Display Adj S...

Page 780: ... reduced but productivity decreases Use Case Upon user s request prevention of soiled Pressure Roller Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that productivity decreases Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default Value 0 TMP TB12 1 Fixing control temperature Plain paper 3 Detail To set the offset of fixing c...

Page 781: ...occurs Use Case When offset fixing failure occurs on recycled paper 1 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Be sure to change the value a little at a time Otherwise offset image failure occurs when setting an extreme value Display Adj Set Range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 1...

Page 782: ...when uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 56 5 mm Use Case When a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper When uneven gloss occurs on the leading edge 56 5 mm Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Be sure to change the value a little at a time Otherwise offset image failure occurs ...

Page 783: ... g m2 As the value is incremented by 1 the control temperature is increased by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs Decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use Case When offset fixing failure occurs on plain paper 1 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Be sure to change ...

Page 784: ... press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display Adj Set Range 00000000 to 11111111 Default Value 00000000 DEV SP2 2 Device special settings 2 Detail To execute the device special settings 2 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main pow...

Page 785: ...j Set Range 00000000 to 11111111 Default Value 00000000 DEV SP8 2 Device special settings 8 Detail To execute the device special settings 8 Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display Adj Set Range 00000000 to 11111111 Default...

Page 786: ...tail To execute the device special setting Use Case For customization Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given Display Adj Set Range 00000000 to 11111111 Default Value 0 RDEV SP4 2 RCON device special settings 4 Detail To execute the device special setting Use Case For ...

Page 787: ...111111 Default Value 0 RDEV SP8 2 RCON device special settings 8 Detail To execute the device special setting Use Case For customization Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given Display Adj Set Range 00000000 to 11111111 Default Value 0 TIFFJPEG 2 For customization DCM ...

Page 788: ...ation SP B30 2 For customization SP B31 2 For customization SP B32 2 For customization SP B33 2 For customization SP B34 2 For customization SP B35 2 For customization SP B36 2 For customization SP B37 2 For customization SP B38 2 For customization SP B39 2 For customization SP B40 2 For customization SP B41 2 For customization SP B42 2 For customization SP B43 2 For customization SP B44 2 For cus...

Page 789: ...ation SP B71 2 For customization SP B72 2 For customization SP B73 2 For customization SP B74 2 For customization SP B75 2 For customization SP B76 2 For customization SP B77 2 For customization SP B78 2 For customization SP B79 2 For customization SP B80 2 For customization SP V01 2 For customization SP V02 2 For customization SP V03 2 For customization SP V04 2 For customization SP V05 2 For cus...

Page 790: ...ation SP V32 2 For customization SP V33 2 For customization SP V34 2 For customization SP V35 2 For customization SP V36 2 For customization SP V37 2 For customization SP V38 2 For customization SP V39 2 For customization SP V40 2 For customization SP V41 2 For customization SP V42 2 For customization SP V43 2 For customization SP V44 2 For customization SP V45 2 For customization SP V46 2 For cus...

Page 791: ...zation SP V71 2 For customization SP V72 2 For customization SP V73 2 For customization SP V74 2 For customization SP V75 2 For customization SP V76 2 For customization SP V77 2 For customization SP V78 2 For customization SP V79 2 For customization SP V80 2 For customization USER COPIER Service mode for copier OPTION Specification setting mode USER COPY LIM 1 Setting of upper limit for copy Detai...

Page 792: ...st Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 999 Default Value It differs according to the location COUNTER3 1 Setting of software counter 3 Detail To set counter type for software counter 3 on the Counter Check screen Use Case Upon user dealer s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and ...

Page 793: ...CCV 2 Control card usage limit for Mail Box Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To restrict use of control card for Mail Box Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Unlimited 1 Limited Default Value 1 CONTROL...

Page 794: ...te Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Default Value 0 JOB INVL 2 Job intvl setting at interruption copy Detail To set output interval between jobs at the time of interruption copy Sorting is difficult after interruption copy because of the continuous output of the next job Paper interval becom...

Page 795: ...ng value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 PRINT category Inbox Print Report Print PDL Print COPY category COPY 1 PRINT category Report Print PDL Print COPY category COPY Inbox Print Default Value 0 P CRG LF 1 ON OFF of Drum Unit life warning display Detail To set whether to display a warning message when the Drum Unit reaches its life When 1 ...

Page 796: ...n OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 PDL job 1 Copy job Default Value 0 PRJOB CP 2 Set count TX at RX report print Detail To set to enable disable a page basis count pulse transmission to the charging management device at the time of reception print or report print Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OF...

Page 797: ...ord entry at the time of registration authentication of department ID With the setting to require entry entry of 7 digit password is required as well as entry of department ID Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Department ID only 1 7 digit password entry Default Value...

Page 798: ... setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution In the case to enable split data transmission be sure to get approval from the user by explaining the following No guarantee for page order on the reception side There is a possibility of interruption of other received jobs between pages Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default Value 0 Related Service...

Page 799: ...Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Password is not required 1 Password is required Default Value 0 PTJAM RC 2 Auto reprint setting at PDL print jam Detail To set to automatically restart printing after jam recovery that occurs with PDL print Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power...

Page 800: ...nnection Connection to be established through network between multiple hosts PC etc Job grouping function A function of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1 0 This is to prevent job interruption from other PC by group job sending multiple jobs in 1 session at job transmission COUNTER7 1 Setting of software counter 7 Detail To set counter type for software counter 7 on the Counter Check scree...

Page 801: ...cute operation to restrict specification Make the setting with the MEAP program which supports job archiving Use Case When using the job archive function Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Caution Setting cannot be made with this item Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON 32 specification restrictions with Bit definition Bit0 Function to obtain image file 0 OFF 1 ON Bit1 Function to compose...

Page 802: ...restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set to prohibit address entry at the time of file transmission File transmission is not available by entering the address because of no display of File on the transmission screen The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and the...

Page 803: ...ny setting Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION USER LDAP SW FREE DSP 2 Display hide of charge disable screen Detail To set whether to display or hide the Use Charge Management screen for switching between charge and no charge The hardware switch for switching charge no charge in the Coin Manager enables the mode in which all the services are available for free store manager mode by ...

Page 804: ...ther to display Preferences External Interface USB Settings Use USB Host By selecting 1 Display whether to use USB host on USB Settings screen can be selected Use Case When switching to display or hide Use USB Host on USB Settings screen Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default V...

Page 805: ...Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default Value 1 USBR DSP 2 ON OFF USB infrared devc MEAP driver use Detail To set whether to display Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device in Settings Registration menu When 1 is set whether to use MEAP driver can be selected on USB Settings screen ...

Page 806: ...Representation Access To set the TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled When 1 is set the TX Report with image is enabled Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default Value 0 JA FREP 2 Setting of Fax TX...

Page 807: ...o set the network scan when iW SAM is enabled When 1 is set the network scan is enabled Use Case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default Value 0 JA PDLB 2 Set of printer driver multi box save SAM Detail Operatio...

Page 808: ...tch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default Value 0 JA WEB 2 Setting of Inbox document upload SAM Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set the Inbox document upload with the Web browser at the time of iW SAM When 1 is set uploading to the Inbox document with the Web Browser is enabled Use Case When the operation r...

Page 809: ...registered Use Case When installing more than 1 machine at the same time Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Hide 1 Display Default Value 0 Supplement Memo If selecting service mode data as the target data of export on remote UI after setting SMD EXPT to 1 service mode data can be exported SNDSTRE...

Page 810: ...nge 0 to 1 0 OFF Display 1 ON Hide Default Value 0 Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION ACC COIN PRTDP SW 1 Set delivery side for 1 page job 2 sided Detail To set whether to deliver paper face up or face down when printing only 1 page although 2 sided print is set When 0 is set paper is delivered face down like 1 sided job Paper does not pass through the Duplex Path When 1 is set paper is delivered ...

Page 811: ... method of the tiered base pricing Name of the tiered base pricing counter displayed on the Check Counter screen is switched according to the selected operation method Use Case When starting operation of the tiered base pricing Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 3 0 Normal charge 1 Tiered base pricin...

Page 812: ...ress OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 A5R 1 STMTR Default Value It differs according to the location Additional Functions Mode Preferences Paper Settings A5R STMTR Paper Selection CST2 P1 1 Setting of Cst2 paper size A5R STMTR Detail To set the paper size A5R STMTR used in the Cassette 2 Use Case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 2 Adj Set Operat...

Page 813: ... D1 ASIZE Supplement Memo 16K paper 270 x 195 mm C2 K SW 2 Set of EXEC 16K size support Cassette 2 Detail To set whether to support EXEC or 16K size K size paper by the Cassette 2 This setting is enabled only for the location where K size paper can be selected in the Control Panel menu For other locations only EXEC can be set Use Case Upon user s request Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting va...

Page 814: ...ON the main power switch Caution Following items are automatically specified when changing the value to 3 from 0 to 2 The change will not be returned even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 from 3 once the mode has been changed COPIER OPTION USER CONTROL 1 COPIER OPTION NETWORK DA CNCT 1 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI BOX UI SEND UI FAX 0 Function Settings Send E Mail I Fax Settings Communication Set...

Page 815: ...ber of sheets Default Value 0 UNIT PRC 2 Setting of Coin Manager currency unit Detail To set currency unit to be handled with Coin Manager Use Case At installation of Coin Manager Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 6 0 Japanese yen 1 Euro 2 Pound 3 Swiss Franc 4 Dollar 5 No currency unit no fractiona...

Page 816: ...r switch Caution With priority on speed output cannot be correctly stopped by the upper limit number of sheets With priority on the upper limit number of sheets processing performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup location Display Adj Set Range 0 to 2 0 No support 1 Priority on speed 2 Priority on upper limit number of sheets Default Value 0 PDL THR 2 Norm PDL pnt set Exte...

Page 817: ...machine is used by the user Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Normal 1 Error not displayed Default Value 0 CV CSZ 1 For customization INT FACE COPIER Service mode for copier OPTION Specification setting mode INT FACE NWCT TM 2 Timeout setting of network connection Detail Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of Restrict Service Representation Access To set the time to keep network conne...

Page 818: ... PDF when transfer is disabled Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST ENPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR ENPDF Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST SPDF 2 Install state dspl of Searchable PDF Detail To display installation state of Searchabl...

Page 819: ...ail To display installation state of Direct Print PDF when transfer is disabled Use Case When checking whether Direct Print PDF is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST PDFDR 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR PDFDR Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting...

Page 820: ...d then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR BRDIM Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST VNC 2 Install state dspl of Remote Oprtr Soft Detail To display installation state of Remote Operators Software when transfer is disabled Use Case When checking whether Remote Operators Software is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST VNC 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installa...

Page 821: ... license key is displayed under TR HRPDF Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST TRSND 2 Install state dspl Trial SEND function Detail To display installation state of Trial SEND function when transfer is disabled Use Case When checking whether Trial SEND function is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST TRSND 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer lice...

Page 822: ...mp PDF JP only when transfer is disabled Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST TSPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR TSPDF Caution This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST USPDF 2 Install state dspl of Dgtl User Sign PDF Detail To display installation sta...

Page 823: ... when transfer is disabled Use Case When checking whether Trace Smooth PDF is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST SCPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR SCPDF Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR SCPDF 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Trace S...

Page 824: ...s key dspl E RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn Detail To display transfer license key to use E RDS non Canon made extension function when the function is disabled with license transfer Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST ERDS 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR ERDS Display Adj Set Range 24 digits Supplement Memo Moni...

Page 825: ...een completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR PSLI5 Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value 0 TR PSLI5 2 Trns lcns key dspl PS LIPS4 LIPS LX JP Detail To display transfer license key to use PS LIPS4 LIPS LX function JP only when transfer is disabled Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST PSLI5 2 Enter ...

Page 826: ...ation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR PSPCL Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR PSPCL 2 Transfer license key dspl of PS PCL func Detail To display transfer license key to use PS PCL function when transfer is disabled Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Met...

Page 827: ...ey When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR PSPCU Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR PSPCU 2 Trns lcns key dspl of PS PCL UFR II func Detail To display transfer license key to use PS PCL UFR II function when transfer is disabled Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the devi...

Page 828: ...JBLK 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR JBLK Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value 0 TR JBLK 2 Trns lcns key dspl of Document Scan Lock Detail To display transfer license key to use Document Scan Lock when transfer is disabled Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj ...

Page 829: ...y When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR OOXML Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR OOXML 2 Trns lcns key display of Office Open XML Detail To display transfer license key to use Office Open XML when transfer is disabled Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj S...

Page 830: ... the function with license transfer Use Case When checking whether PCL Font Set is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST OPFNT 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR OPFNT Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR OPFNT 2 Trns license key display...

Page 831: ... IPFAX when transfer is disabled Use Case When replacing HDD When replacing the device Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select ST IPFAX 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR IPFAX Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST U RDS 2 Install state display of E RDS function Detail To display installation state of Embedded RDS function when disabling the function with license t...

Page 832: ...d 1 Select ST SMLG 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR SMLG Display Adj Set Range When operation finished normally OK Default Value According to the setting at shipment TR SMLG 2 Trns lcns key dspl picture login func Detail To display transfer license key to use picture login function when the function is disabled with...

Page 833: ... press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR FRWEB Display Adj Set Range 24 digits ST FRWEB 2 Instl state dspl Web Access SW free ver Detail To display installation state of the free version of Web Access Software when disabling and then transferring the license of it Use Case When checking whether the free version of Web Access Software is installed Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select...

Page 834: ...zation SP B30 2 For customization SP B31 2 For customization SP B32 2 For customization SP B33 2 For customization SP B34 2 For customization SP B35 2 For customization SP B36 2 For customization SP B37 2 For customization SP B38 2 For customization SP B39 2 For customization SP B40 2 For customization SP B41 2 For customization SP B42 2 For customization SP B43 2 For customization SP B44 2 For cu...

Page 835: ...zation SP B71 2 For customization SP B72 2 For customization SP B73 2 For customization SP B74 2 For customization SP B75 2 For customization SP B76 2 For customization SP B77 2 For customization SP B78 2 For customization SP B79 2 For customization SP B80 2 For customization SP V01 2 For customization SP V02 2 For customization SP V03 2 For customization SP V04 2 For customization SP V05 2 For cu...

Page 836: ...zation SP V32 2 For customization SP V33 2 For customization SP V34 2 For customization SP V35 2 For customization SP V36 2 For customization SP V37 2 For customization SP V38 2 For customization SP V39 2 For customization SP V40 2 For customization SP V41 2 For customization SP V42 2 For customization SP V43 2 For customization SP V44 2 For customization SP V45 2 For customization SP V46 2 For cu...

Page 837: ...2 For customization SP V65 2 For customization SP V66 2 For customization SP V67 2 For customization SP V68 2 For customization SP V69 2 For customization SP V70 2 For customization SP V71 2 For customization SP V72 2 For customization SP V73 2 For customization SP V74 2 For customization SP V75 2 For customization SP V76 2 For customization SP V77 2 For customization SP V78 2 For customization SP...

Page 838: ... OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 14 0 Error diffusion 1 Low screen ruling approx 133 to 190 lines 2 High screen ruling approx 200 to 268 lines 3 to 4 Not used 5 Error diffusion with trailing edge adjustment 6 High screen ruling with trailing edge adjustment 7 to 8 Not used 9 1 2 speed low screen ruling approx 133 to 190 lines 10 1 2 speed high screen ruling approx 200 to 268 lines 11 to 13 Not u...

Page 839: ...t whether to output Y color at the time of test print The setting is applied to all types When setting COLOR Y to 1 and COLOR M C K to 0 a single Y color is output Use Case At test print Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not output 1 Output Related Service Mode COPIER TEST PG COLOR M C K COLOR M 1 Setting of M color output at test p...

Page 840: ...splay Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Full color 1 Single color Default Value 0 PG PICK 1 Setting of test print Pickup Cassette Detail To set the Pickup Cassette for test print output Use Case At trouble analysis At test print output Adj Set Operate Method Select the item and then press OK key Display Adj Set Range 1 to 8 1 Cassette 1 2 Cassette 2 3 Cassette 3 4 Cassette 4 5 Multi purpose Tray 6 to 8 Not u...

Page 841: ...on of NIC replace NIC Display Adj Set Range 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 At normal state OK At failure occurrence NG Supplement Memo Remote host address IP address of PC terminal in network Loopback address 127 0 0 1 Checking TCP IP of this machine is available because the signal is returned before NIC NIC Network interface Local host address IP address of this machine BML DISP 2 Set System Monitor ...

Page 842: ...etwork packet capture Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Related Service Mode COPIER TEST NET CAP Additional Functions Mode Store Network Packet Log PONSTART 2 Set network packet capture start timing Detail To set whether to perform network packet capture from power on Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Ra...

Page 843: ...nd then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display Adj Set Range 0 to 1 0 Not filtered 1 Filtered ENCDATA 2 Setting of packet data encryption Detail To set whether to encrypt the packet data when writing the captured packet data to the USB memory Use Case At problem analysis at packet data analysis When improving security of written packet data Adj Set Operate Method 1 Enter the sett...

Page 844: ...ve the ITB Unit Drum Unit Display of standard jam code indicates that a jam occurs somewhere other than the specified position Setting of forcible stop is enabled until paper stops at the specified position The setting is disabled for job where paper does not pass through the specified position Unfixed toner may be adhered on paper depending on the stop position Thus handle it with care Display Ad...

Page 845: ... Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 BOX PRT 1 Inbox print counter Detail To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at Inbox print Large size 1 small size 1 A blank sheet is not counted Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 RPT PRT 1 Report print counter Detail To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at rep...

Page 846: ...ue 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 DFOP CNT 1 DADF hinge open close counter Detail DADF hinge open close counter Use Case When checking the DADF hinge open close counter Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 JAM COPIER Service mode for copier COUNTER Counter mode JAM TOTAL 1 Host machine total jam counter Detail Host machine total jam counter Use Case When c...

Page 847: ...achine s Cassette 4 MISC COPIER Service mode for copier COUNTER Counter mode MISC T SPLY Y 1 Y toner supply counter Detail Number of Y color toner supply blocks Counted for every one rotation of Toner Stirring Screw Use Case When checking the usage status of toner Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit block Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 T SPLY M 1 M toner supply counter Detail Num...

Page 848: ...nit time Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 ST NDL 1 Staple needle counter Fin C1 Detail To count the use of the staple needle Use Case When checking the usage status of the staple needle Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Amount of Change per Unit 1 ENT PTH 1 Finisher feed path counter Detail Paper pass counter on the Finisher feed path Use Case When checking the number of fed...

Page 849: ...ent 2nd line Estimated life Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Default Value 0 Related Service Mode C...

Page 850: ...Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Default Value 0 C1 SP RL 1 Cassette1 Separation Roller prts counter Detail 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key...

Page 851: ...the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 M FD RL 1 Multi purpose Tray Feed Roll prts cntr Detail 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the...

Page 852: ...d line Estimated life Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Default Value 0 HOPPER K 1 Hopper Bk parts c...

Page 853: ...ife Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Default Value 0 EXIT U 1 Inner Delivery Unit parts counter Det...

Page 854: ...en press Clear key Caution Clear the counter value if it is replaced while neither the Waste Toner Container preparation warning message nor waste toner full message is displayed Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 PT DR Y 1 Drum Unit Y parts counter Detail 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life The ...

Page 855: ...e Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 FIX DR U 1 Fi...

Page 856: ...When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Supplement Memo Regardless of the read mode 1 si...

Page 857: ...ife value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Un...

Page 858: ...ter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 1 C2 PU RL 1 Cassette 2 Pickup Roller parts counter Detail 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set O...

Page 859: ... key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit time Default Value 0 FIN SPDL 1 Paper Return Paddle parts counter Detail 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj Set Operate Method To clear the counter value Select the item and then...

Page 860: ... 0 to 999 Unit Amount of Change per Unit 1 C DRM LF 1 Display of Drum Unit C life Detail To display how much it is close to the end of life that is calculated from the value stored in the Drum Unit Memory PCB in percentage When a new part is set the value becomes 0 It cannot be changed manually Use Case When checking the life of Drum Unit Display Adj Set Range 0 to 999 Unit Amount of Change per Un...

Page 861: ... parts based on the number of delivered sheets Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 G64 75 1 Delivered sheet counter 64 to 75 g m2 Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 64 to 75 g m2 1st line The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size 2nd line The counter is advanced by 1 ...

Page 862: ... g m2 1st line The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size 2nd line The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 G151 163 1 Delivered sheet counter ...

Page 863: ...00 g m2 1st line The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size 2nd line The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 G301 325 1 Delivered sheet counte...

Page 864: ... or more 1st line The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size 2nd line The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts based on the number of delivered sheets Adj Set Operate Method N A Display only Display Adj Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit sheet Amount of Change per Unit 1 8 Service Mode 853 ...

Page 865: ...on at DADF reading As the value is incremented by 1 the image is reduced by 0 1 in vertical scanning direction The feeding speed increases and the image is reduced Use Case When installing DADF When replacing the Reader Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 200 to 200 Unit Default Value...

Page 866: ...ide are different at 2 sided reading Adj Set Operate Method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display Adj Set Range 10 to 10 Unit Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 1 ADJMSCN2 1 Fine adj img ratio 2 sided horz scan bck Detail To make a fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction at DADF 2 sided reading ...

Page 867: ...ositively for approx 5 seconds The motor stops after 5 seconds from turning OFF the clutch Use Case At operation check Adj Set Operate Method 1 Select the item and then press OK key The roller stops automatically after positive rotation 2 Press OK key The operation check is completed Caution Press OK key again after execution It stops automatically after approx 5 sec however it does not finish unl...

Page 868: ...e item and then press OK key Related Service Mode FEEDER FUNCTION FEED CHK OPTION Specification setting mode FEEDER ADF service mode OPTION Specification setting mode R ATM 1 Set DADF double feed dtct highland mode Detail To set the Double Feed Sensor of the DADF to the highland mode Set 1 if the installation site is above the altitude of 2000 meters Use Case When the installation site is above th...

Page 869: ...e an adjustment according to the paper width the user uses and degree of curl Display Adj Set Range 20 to 20 Unit mm Default Value 0 Amount of Change per Unit 0 25 OPTION Specification setting mode SORTER Service mode for delivery options OPTION Specification setting mode MD SPRTN 1 Set restriction at Finisher error Detail To set whether to stop the machine when an error occurs at Finisher Use Cas...

Page 870: ...on board setting mode OPTION Specification setting mode BOARD Option board setting mode OPTION Specification setting mode MENU 1 2 Not used MENU 2 2 Not used MENU 3 2 Not used MENU 4 2 Not used 8 Service Mode 859 ...

Page 871: ...lation 862 Document Scan Lock Kit B1 863 IC Card Reader BOX D1 869 IC Card Reader Attachment A1 887 Copy Card Reader F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment B4 893 Serial Interface Kit K3 Copy Control Interface Kit A1 906 NFC Kit C1 917 Connection Kit A1 for Bluetooth LE 928 ...

Page 872: ...ymbols in this procedure 1x 1x 1x Install Screw Packaged Item Remove Tighten Loosen 1x Connect Connector Disconnect Install Harness Common for Guides and Clamps Remove 1x 1x Connect Power Cord Disconnect Check visually Check the sound Check OFF Cleaning ON Push Power Unused Parts 1x 1x 9 Installation 861 ...

Page 873: ... to be installed by the user For details of installation procedure refer to the Getting Started Setting the Dehumidification Switch If the installation environment is a high humidity environment be sure to turn ON the Dehumidification Switch 9 Installation 862 ...

Page 874: ...nnot be installed unless it is removed For the removal procedure refer to the chapter on Installation in the Service Manual CAUTION An error occurs when the license is installed before installing the Image Analysis Board so make sure to install the license after installing the Image Analysis Board Installation Outline Drawing Checking the Contents 1x 1x Binding M3x4 1x 3x 3x 1x TP M3x6 3x TP M3x6 ...

Page 875: ...ine with the installed Cassette Feeding Unit and proceed to step 4 in the case of the machine without the installed Cassette Feeding Unit 2 In the case of the machine the without installed Cassette Heater Unit In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 9 Installation 864 ...

Page 876: ...3 In the case of the machine the without installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x 4 5x 9 Installation 865 ...

Page 877: ...5 Installation Procedure 1 1x 2 CAUTION When handling the hard disc be careful not to vibrate or drop it 2x 1x 1x 3 1x 9 Installation 866 ...

Page 878: ...cers to improve work efficiency 2x 5 NOTE Be sure to install the PCB Spacers in the order of 1 to 3 Hold the first PCB Spacer with your fingers and remove the second and subsequent PCB Spacers 3x 3x 6 3x 7 3x 1x TP M3x6 9 Installation 867 ...

Page 879: ...ally update the version of the host machine NOTE If Skip is selected a message prompting the user to update the version will appear every time the host machine is started In the service mode shown below it is possible to set not to display the message prompting the user to update the version Service mode Level 2 COPIER OPTION FNC SW VER CHNG 4 Ask users to install license 5 Turn OFF ON the main po...

Page 880: ...ver refer to Removing the Equipment in the chapter Parts Replacement and Cleaning of Service Manual for Staple Finisher If the Copy Card Reader is installed this equipment cannot be installed unless it is removed For the removal procedure refer to the chapter on Installation in the Service Manual The work to be performed is the same for the printer model although the illustration of the machine is...

Page 881: ...er switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Preparation When Installing to the Host Machine 1 CAUTION Remove the claw on Bottom Cover of the IC Card Reader Box Unit by pinching it in the direction of the arrow Bottom Cover Lower Cover CAUTION The removed Base Cover of the IC Card Reader Unit will be used i...

Page 882: ...2 CAUTION Do not install the IC Card Reader Support Plate in the opposite direction 4x TP M3x6 3 9 Installation 871 ...

Page 883: ... When Installing to the Finisher 1 NOTE Remove the claw on Bottom Cover of the IC Card Reader Box Unit by pinching it in the direction of the arrow Bottom Cover Lower Cover 2 3 9 Installation 872 ...

Page 884: ... Tightening M3x8 Removing the Covers In the case of a model with a reader 1 NOTE For following step proceed to step 4 in the case of the machine without the installed Cassette Feeding Unit 9 Installation 873 ...

Page 885: ...alled Cassette Heater Unit In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 3 In the case of the machine the without installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x 9 Installation 874 ...

Page 886: ...4 5x 5 In the case of a printer model 1 2x NOTE For following step proceed to step 5 in the case of the machine without the installed Cassette Feeding Unit 9 Installation 875 ...

Page 887: ...2 4x 3 In the case of the machine the without installed Cassette Heater Unit In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 9 Installation 876 ...

Page 888: ...4 In the case of the machine the without installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x 5 5x 6 9 Installation 877 ...

Page 889: ...en removing the cover do not insert a screwdriver in the oval hole NOTE If the IC Card Reader Mounting Plate is not installed proceed to step 2 If the IC Card Reader Mounting Plate is already installed perform step 3 and then proceed to step 6 2 3x 3 3x 9 Installation 878 ...

Page 890: ...4 4x TP M3x6 5 3x 6 2x TP M3x6 7 8 9 Installation 879 ...

Page 891: ...9 1x 10 1x 11 2x 12 4x 13 9 Installation 880 ...

Page 892: ...14 15 16 17 18 In the case of model with reader without Cassette Pedestal 3x 5x 3x In the case of model with reader having Cassette Pedestal 9 Installation 881 ...

Page 893: ...ette Pedestal 2x 2x 2x 5x 3x 3x In the case of printer model having Cassette Pedestal 5x 2x 2x 3x 3x 2x 19 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 20 Turn ON the main power switch When Installing to the Finisher 1 9 Installation 882 ...

Page 894: ...2 1x 3 1x 4 2x 2x 5 In the case of model with reader without Cassette Pedestal 5x In the case of model with reader having Cassette Pedestal 9 Installation 883 ...

Page 895: ...model without Cassette Pedestal 5x 2x 2x 2x In the case of printer model having Cassette Pedestal 5x 2x 2x 2x 6 CAUTION Be sure that 2 hooks of Finisher are properly hooked to holes of the Optional Harness Cover 9 Installation 884 ...

Page 896: ...over 1x P Tightening M3x8 8 NOTE Be sure to adjust the number of Sponge Sheets 1 or 2 sheets according to how the cable of the Card Reader is stored Loop the extra length of the USB cable around so that the Card Reader sales company s option is securely fitted 9 Installation 885 ...

Page 897: ...Sheet for Europe to the hole of IC Card Reader Box Unit Lower Cover with the illustration side facing up and bending the bar code area Be sure that the IC Card Reader Box Upper Cover is installed properly 9 Installation 886 ...

Page 898: ...ard Reader BOX D1 Installation Outline Drawing Checking the Contents 1x 2x 1x 1x Binding 1x Others Including guides Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure 1 2 9 Installation 887 ...

Page 899: ...oval 5 NOTE The removed rod will not be used NOTE Proceed to the procedure for the Card Reader In the case of a Card Reader manufactured by SAXA Proceed to step 6 In the case of a Card Reader manufactured by TOPPAN Proceed to step 10 In the case of a Card Reader manufactured by SAXA 6 9 Installation 888 ...

Page 900: ...7 8 9 NOTE Proceed to step 13 In the case of a Card Reader manufactured by TOPPAN 10 9 Installation 889 ...

Page 901: ...11 12 1x 13 NOTE Use the screw removed in steps 3 1x 14 NOTE Be sure to wind it counterclockwise 1x 9 Installation 890 ...

Page 902: ...15 Binding 1x 1x 1x 16 CAUTION Be sure to align the corners with the indexes 9 Installation 891 ...

Page 903: ...17 9 Installation 892 ...

Page 904: ... When installing at the same time with the Image Analysis Board be sure to install this Image Analysis Board first The following options cannot be used in combination with this equipment Serial Interface Kit Copy Control Interface Kit The work to be performed is the same for the printer model although the illustration of the machine is of a model with a reader Installation Outline Drawing Checking...

Page 905: ...r Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Removing the Covers In the case of a model with a reader 1 NOTE For following step proceed to step 4 in the case of the machine without the installed Cassette Feeding Unit 9 Installation 894 ...

Page 906: ...alled Cassette Heater Unit In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 3 In the case of the machine the without installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x 9 Installation 895 ...

Page 907: ...4 5x 5 In the case of a printer model 1 2x NOTE For following step proceed to step 5 in the case of the machine without the installed Cassette Feeding Unit 9 Installation 896 ...

Page 908: ...2 4x 3 In the case of the machine the without installed Cassette Heater Unit In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 9 Installation 897 ...

Page 909: ...4 In the case of the machine the without installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x 5 5x 6 9 Installation 898 ...

Page 910: ... Installing the Card Reader Relay Connector Unit 1 1x 2 CAUTION When handling the hard disc be careful not to vibrate or drop it 2x 1x 1x 3 2x 4 1x 9 Installation 899 ...

Page 911: ...1x 6 2x 1x 1x Installing the Covers 1 In the case of model with reader without Cassette Pedestal 5x 2x 1x 1x 1x In the case of model with reader having Cassette Pedestal 5x 1x 1x 2x 1x 9 Installation 900 ...

Page 912: ...having Cassette Pedestal 2x 5x 1x 1x 2x 2x 2x 1x 1x Installation Procedure CAUTION After installing the Copy Card Reader F1 enter the card number to be used in the following service mode Level 1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD Otherwise the card will not be recognized even inserting it 1 1x 1x 9 Installation 901 ...

Page 913: ...2 3 RS Tightening M4x10 Boss 1x 1x 4 CAUTION Be sure that the core is inside the Edge Saddle 1x 1x 9 Installation 902 ...

Page 914: ...5 6 2x Screw w washer M3x14 7 4x TP M3x6 9 Installation 903 ...

Page 915: ...connector does not become disconnected be sure to place the tie wrap of the Card Reader External Relay Harness on the inside of the Connector Cover 1x TP M3x6 9 10 11 2x 12 Connect the power plug to the outlet 9 Installation 904 ...

Page 916: ...be used 1 to 2001 in service mode Level 1 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD Starting from the entered card number the number of cards set in step 4 can be used 6 Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to enable the setting value 7 Insert a card with a card number that has been registered and check that the machine operates properly NOTE Perform the following operations to change the number of cards...

Page 917: ...nterface Kit cannot be used concurrently Table of Options Combination Copy Card Reader Serial Inter face Kit Copy Control Interface Kit Serial Inter face Kit no no Copy Control Interface Kit no no no Unavailable Installation Outline Drawing Checking the Contents Serial Interface Kit K3 1x 1x 1x Short 1x 2x 2x TP M3 x 6 3x Long 1x 1x 1x Copy Control Interface Kit A1 2x 2x 2x 1x 1x 2x 1x 9 Installat...

Page 918: ...urned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure Removing the Covers In the case of a model with a reader 1 NOTE For following step proceed to step 4 in the case of the machine without the installed Cassette Feeding Unit 2 In the case of the machine the without installed Cassette Heater Unit In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 9 Installation 907 ...

Page 919: ...3 In the case of the machine the without installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x 4 5x 9 Installation 908 ...

Page 920: ...5 In the case of a printer model 1 2x NOTE For following step proceed to step 5 in the case of the machine without the installed Cassette Feeding Unit 2 4x 9 Installation 909 ...

Page 921: ...alled Cassette Heater Unit In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 4 In the case of the machine the without installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x In the case of the machine the installed Cassette Heater Unit 1x 9 Installation 910 ...

Page 922: ...5 5x 6 Installing the Serial Interface Kit 1 1x 2 CAUTION When handling the hard disc be careful not to vibrate or drop it 2x 1x 1x 9 Installation 911 ...

Page 923: ...3 2x 4 Short 1x 5 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 7 6 1x 9 Installation 912 ...

Page 924: ...ing a screw or washer may result in damage so be sure to pick it up NOTE Use the screw removed in step 5 2x 1x 1x Installing the Copy Control Interface Kit 1 1x 2 CAUTION When handling the hard disc be careful not to vibrate or drop it 2x 1x 1x 9 Installation 913 ...

Page 925: ...rt Plate as shown in the figure Inside 5 CAUTION Be careful not to drop the screws and washers Dropping a screw or washer may result in damage so be sure to pick it up CAUTION Install the CC VI Cable in the direction shown in the figure 1x 2x 9 Installation 914 ...

Page 926: ...al positions In the case of model with reader without Cassette Pedestal 5x 2x 1x 1x 1x In the case of model with reader having Cassette Pedestal 5x 1x 1x 2x 1x In the case of printer model without Cassette Pedestal 2x 2x 2x 5x 2x 1x 1x 1x 9 Installation 915 ...

Page 927: ... In the case of printer model having Cassette Pedestal 2x 5x 1x 1x 2x 2x 2x 1x 1x 9 Installation 916 ...

Page 928: ...fer from the actual things the procedure is the same Installation Outline Drawing Checking the Contents TP M3x4 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x Others Guides are included Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Install...

Page 929: ...3 4 4x 5 CAUTION Be sure to place 5 or more sheets of paper to prevent damage 6 7 8 1x 9 Installation 918 ...

Page 930: ...9 10 11 1x 12 13 9 Installation 919 ...

Page 931: ...14 2x 15 16 2x 17 6x 18 4x 9 Installation 920 ...

Page 932: ... Installing the NFC kit C1 1 1x 2 1x 3 TP M3x4 1x 9 Installation 921 ...

Page 933: ...s to Note when Installing the Slide Unit Be sure that the harness does not interfere with the screw head If the harness interferes with the screw head the Slide Unit interferes with the harness resulting in damage of the harness 4x 9 Installation 922 ...

Page 934: ...2 6x 3 2x 4 NOTE Be sure to pay attention to the direction of the cover 5 2x 6 9 Installation 923 ...

Page 935: ...7 8 1x 9 10 11 1x 9 Installation 924 ...

Page 936: ... Control Panel Tilt Cover 2 is outside the cover of the host machine the Control Panel cannot be tilted CAUTION Be sure not to put the A part between the plates B and C B C C B A A NOTE Push the A part against the B part engage the hook and pull the Control Panel toward the front to install it A B 14 9 Installation 925 ...

Page 937: ...15 4x CAUTION Be sure to check the tilting operation Be sure to check the sliding operation If there is something wrong with the operation repeat from step 13 16 17 18 9 Installation 926 ...

Page 938: ...IER FUNCTION INSTALL NFC USE NOTE When System Manager Information Settings is set it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions of the user administrator 5 Select Settings Registration Management Settings Device Management Use NFC Card Emulation and set the item to ON 6 Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch 7 When a message prompting the version update is displa...

Page 939: ...nly for US 1x Only for TW 1x Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that the display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off and then disconnect the power plug Installation Procedure 1 2 1x 9 Installation 928 ...

Page 940: ...3 1x 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 4 4 NOTE Use the screw removed in step 3 1x 1x 5 1x 6 9 Installation 929 ...

Page 941: ... following countries it is not necessary to affix the Approval Label For US Affix it over the number on the Wireless LAN Approval Label RQWDLQV 0 0 0 0 RQWDLQV US For CN KR and TW Affix it over the Wireless LAN Approval Label CN KR TW 9 Installation 930 ...

Page 942: ... in as a system manager in accordance with instructions of the user administrator 4 Select Settings Registration Preferences Network Confirm Network Connection Setting Changes and set the item ON 5 Select Settings Registration Preferences Network Bluetooth Settings Use Bluetooth ON 6 The message Perform Apply Setting Changes from Settings Registration appears at the bottom of the Touch Panel Displ...

Page 943: ...APPENDICES Service Tool 933 General Circuit Diagram 936 Software Counter Specifications 949 Removal 954 Target PCBs of Automatic Update 957 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored 958 ...

Page 944: ...lcohol Molykote EM 50L Lubrication e g Bearing part of the finisher HY9 0007 Tospearl 240 Grease Drum Cleaning Blade Lubricant FY9 6007 Molykote HP 300 Bushings L R of the pressure roller CK 8012 FLOIL GE 676 Conducting grease Contact plate spring Developing sleeve electrode Mineral oil FY9 6023 FLOIL G 337 Lubrication e g scanner rail FY9 6030 SHC oil HANARL UD 321 FY9 6037 Quick drying grease Si...

Page 945: ...tion Pickup Assembly Bushing FC0 5888 Inner diameter of shaft fitting part Support of the shaft Registration Pickup Assembly Pick up latch lever FE3 1585 Sliding area of the AB plate One place Multi purpose Tray Unit 33T Gear FU6 1304 Sliding area of the MP frame Multi purpose Tray Unit Feed Roller Estrangement Cam FE3 3589 Sliding area of the MP frame and cam Multi purpose Tray Unit Feed Roller h...

Page 946: ... no need to apply grease because unit has been assembled after grease application However when replacing the parts as a single part apply grease HANARL UD 321 to the application position described in the table because no grease is applied to the part Since HANARL UD 321 is quick drying and transparent caution is required to identify the area where it is applied Service Tool 935 ...

Page 947: ...UN84 ECO ID PCB Motion Sensor PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 J10 J5204 1 2 3 1 2 J5205 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 J16D J16LH 1 2 3 4 J4513 1 2 3 4 5 J4510 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J15LH J15L J15D 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J303 230 COR4 3 4 5 6 1 2 J5 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J4509 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J4512 J1024 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 J6 COR8 2 3 4 1 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 2 3 1 J5210230M 2 3 4 1 J5211230M J...

Page 948: ...Main Thermistor TH03 Sub Thermistor Front TH02 Sub Thermistor Rear HOT NEUTRAL FRONT_DOOR_SW 3 3V_SW 5V 5V_IL 24VD GND 24VILSW GND GND HEATER1_ON RL_ON_N RL_ON_H VOLTAGE_DET SEESAW_SW ZEROX RMT_ENG_24V GND 5V_IL 2 1 2 1 J5407 TB6 1 2 TB5 1 2 1 2 1 2 J5402M J5402F 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 J5403 3 2 1 1 2 3 J5404D 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 J5405D J5405DH 2 1 J5405L J5406DH J5406D J5406L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8...

Page 949: ...oner Log Connector Bk M08 Reverse Motor SW05 Right Door Open CloseDetection Switch M04 Fixing Motor FM03 Delivery Cooling Fan M10 Bottle Motor CK 1 2 3 4 M 1 2 3 J5301 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 2 1 J5303 SOLD24 SOLD26 1 2 M 1 2 M SOLD25 SOLD23 2 1 1 2 3 4 J5415 1 2 J6401L SOLD44 SOLD43 J6402L SOLD46 SOLD45 SOLD47 J6404L J6403L SOLD48 SOLD50 SOLD49 1 2 3 J5302 3 2 1 1 2 3 J5304 3 2 1 J6301L J6301DH 1 2 J6302L ...

Page 950: ...sette 1 Pickup Sensor M05 Power Supply Cooling Fan M06 Pre registration Motor M11 Cassette 1 Lifter Motor SW09 Cassette 1 size switch PS20 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor J5503 3 2 1 1 2 3 J5504 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 J5505 3 2 1 3 2 1 J5506 4 3 2 1 M 4 3 2 1 M SOLD22 SOLD21 1 2 M 1 2 3 4 J5550 2 4 3 1 2 3 1 J5551 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 J5511 J5509L 1 2 3 4 J5513 1 2 J5552L J5552DH 1 2 J5552...

Page 951: ...nsor PS11 Arch Sensor PS01 Duplex Sensor FM04 Duplex Cooling Fan SL02 Duplex Solenoid J5612L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J5604 1 2 SL 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J5603 1 2 3 J5607 3 2 1 1 2 3 J5609 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 3 J5610L J5612D J5612DH 1 2 1 2 3 J5608 1 2 3 J5610DH J5610D 1 2 SL 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J5602DH J5602L J5616DH 1 2 3 4 5 6 J5616L 1 2 3 4 5 6 J561...

Page 952: ... M CL03 Developing Cylinder Clutch C CL04 Developing Cylinder Clutch Bk M03 Developing Motor SL01 Primary Transfer Disengagement Solenoid M02 Bk Drum_ITB Motor M01 CL Drum Motor 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J5702 1 2 SL J5705LH 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 M 2 1 CL 2 1 CL 2 1 CL 1 2 2 1 CL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J5701 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 2 J5705L J5705D J5708DH J5708D J5708L 9...

Page 953: ...Y 24V P GND 3 3V S GND CHG_DC_PWM_Y OP_CST_CNCT OP_CST_IRQ OP_CST_Tx OP_CST_Rx 5V_FU 24V_OP 24V_OP 3 3V UN04 DC Controller PCB UN33 Environment Sensor UN06 Developing High voltage PCB UN02 Secondary Transfer High voltage PCB GND GND GND GND 3 3V ENVHUMDTY GND ENVTEMP PIN5901 SOLD5901 PIN5902 SOLD5902 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 19 J251 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ...

Page 954: ...nit Relay PCB Y UN09 Drum Unit Relay PCB M UN10 Drum Unit Relay PCB C UN11 Drum Unit Relay PCB Bk UN15 Drum Unit Memory PCB Bk SW07 ITB Pressure Release Switch UN37 ATR Sensor Bk UN17 Waste Toner Sensor PCB M07 Registration Motor FM01 Drum Unit Suction Cooling Fan Staple Finisher Z1 UN36 ATR Sensor C UN35 ATR Sensor M UN34 ATR Sensor Y UN14 Drum Unit Memory PCB C UN13 Drum Unit Memory PCB M UN12 D...

Page 955: ..._PCPRDY GND IF_DCON_LIVE SET_VOC_ON_DC DCON_SNS_INT1 DCON_SNS_INT2 IF_INT_DCON IF_PDOWNLD VDOEN BD ITOP_IMG2L INT_IMG1L IMG1L_SYS_RST Reserve GND IF_DDIP_RST IF_PCTS IF_PPRDY IF_PRTS IMG_GBD_OUT GND GND IMG2L_RX UART IMG2L_TX UART 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 M J6104 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 J6103L J6103LH 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 40 J201 J6103D J202 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21...

Page 956: ...INE_L1 3_LINE_L2 4_LINE_L1 4_LINE_L2 MONI_USB GND FC_USB_IN J6 J3 J4 R BK J4 LINE2 J1 T2 T1 N C N C L1 CT2 CT1 L2 LINE4 LINE3 LINE1 LINE1 3 4 5 6 1 2 J704 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 J701 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 2 3 1 J742 J732 J731 2 3 4 1 J720 J41L 2 1 J744 1 2 3 J741 1 2 3 J736 8 ...

Page 957: ...INE_L1 3_LINE_L2 4_LINE_L1 4_LINE_L2 MONI_USB GND FC_USB_IN J6 J3 J4 R BK J4 LINE2 J1 T2 T1 N C N C L1 CT2 CT1 L2 LINE4 LINE3 LINE1 LINE1 3 4 5 6 1 2 J704 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 J701 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 2 3 1 J742 J732 J731 2 3 4 1 J720 J41L 2 1 J744 1 2 3 J741 1 2 3 J736 8 ...

Page 958: ...anel Numeric Keypad PCB UN83 Control Panel CPU PCB Motion Sensor PCB SP1 FAX Speaker UN96 Wireless LAN PCB UN81 Main Controller PCB GND SKEY7 SKEY6 SKEY5 SKEY4 SKEY3 SKEY2 SKEY1 SKEY0 GND J1 Option J21 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J20 1 2 3 4 J6000 1 2 3 4 J18 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 19 J4501 1 2 3 4 5 J4502 2 1 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 19 J020 1 2...

Page 959: ...ED SR2 Delivery Sensor CL4200 ADF Separation Clutch CL4201 ADF Registration Clutch SR5 ADF Cover Sensor M4100 Reader Motor SR3 CIS HP Sensor SR4 ADF Open Closed Sensor SR4206 Document End Sensor GND 24S_L US_PLS anode cathode 24 40 38 36 34 32 30 28 26 20 18 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 12 14 22 J6 24 40 38 36 34 32 30 28 26 20 18 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...

Page 960: ...een Counter item Number on the screen Counter item 071 Toner Bottle Black 091 1 10 Toner Bottle Counter Black 072 Toner Bottle Yellow 092 1 10 Toner Bottle Counter Yellow 073 Toner Bottle Magenta 093 1 10 Toner Bottle Counter Magenta 074 Toner Bottle Cyan 094 1 10 Toner Bottle Counter Cyan 100 to 199 Number on the screen Counter item Number on the screen Counter item 101 Total 1 140 Large A 2 side...

Page 961: ...0 Copy A Black 2 202 Copy Total 2 251 Copy A Full Color Large 203 Copy Large 252 Copy A Full Color Small 204 Copy Small 253 Copy A Single Color Large 205 Copy A Total 1 254 Copy A Single Color Small 206 Copy A Total 2 255 Copy A Black Large 207 Copy A Large 256 Copy A Black Small 208 Copy A Small 257 Copy A Full Color Single Color Large 209 Local copy Total 1 258 Copy A Full Color Single Color Sma...

Page 962: ...int Black 2 310 Print Full Color 2 341 PDL print Full Color Large 311 Print Single Color 1 342 PDL print Full Color Small 312 Print Single Color 2 343 PDL print Single Color Large 313 Print Black 1 344 PDL print Single Color Small 314 Print Black 2 345 PDL print Black Large 315 Print Full Color Large 346 PDL print Black Small 316 Print Full Color Small 351 PDL print Full Color Large 2 sided 317 Pr...

Page 963: ...1 626 Mail Box print Black Small 2 sided 606 Mail Box print Full Color 2 631 Memory media print Total 1 607 Mail Box print Single Color 1 632 Memory media print Total 2 608 Mail Box print Single Color 2 633 Memory media print Large 609 Mail Box print Black 1 634 Memory media print Small 610 Mail Box print Black 2 635 Memory media print Full Color 1 611 Mail Box print Full Color Large 636 Memory me...

Page 964: ...ll 2 sided 733 Advanced Box print Black 1 757 Network print Black Large 2 sided 734 Advanced Box print Black 2 758 Network print Black Small 2 sided 800 to 899 Number on the screen Counter item Number on the screen Counter item 801 Report print Total 1 811 Report print Full Color Large 802 Report print Total 2 812 Report print Full Color Small 803 Report print Large 815 Report print Black Large 80...

Page 965: ...elete data Note that increasing the number of overwrite increases the time required for the deletion operation NOTE When you perform Initialize All Data Settings license and data of MEAP application are initialized to the state same as when the HDD is replaced If MEAP application may be used by other users after the machine is removed disable the MEAP application and uninstall it in advance Perfor...

Page 966: ... after Initialize All Data Settings is completed Consider using this report to provide to user as a material to inform of work details when executing Initialize All Data Settings upon user s request Operation after Initialize All Data Settings The machine is started normally at restart after Initialize All Data Settings without displaying the message Turn OFF the main power supply on the right sid...

Page 967: ... fail a function to select ON OFF of report output is not provided There is no second output of report when the machine is turned ON without paper Only the output of this report remains in the job log Deletion of Service Mode Setting Values Service Mode Lev1 Function CLEAR MN CON NOTE When MN CON clear is executed the address book on the HDD is not deleted As for the user data initialize all the d...

Page 968: ...rvice Manual as PCBs supported by the automatic update function List of Target PCBs of Automatic Update Category Target PCB Service mode COPIER Display VERSION Printer engine DC Controller PCB DC CON Staple Finisher Finisher Controller PCB SORTER Target PCBs of Automatic Update 957 ...

Page 969: ...ain item Intermediate item Sub item Case A B C COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ X Restored COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y Restored COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ S Restored COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y DF Restored COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY STRD POS Restored COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ X MG Restored COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJY DF2 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT X Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD W PLT Y Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD W...

Page 970: ...UST CCD MTF M8 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF M9 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S1 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S2 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S3 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S4 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S5 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S6 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S7 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S8 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF S9 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH R2 Restored C...

Page 971: ...estored COPIER ADJUST CCD GAIN2CL0 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD LED CL R Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD LED2CL R Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD LED CLR2 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD LED2CLR2 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST3CL0 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST3CL1 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST3CL2 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST3CL3 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST3CL4 Restored COPIER ADJUST CCD OFST3CL5 Resto...

Page 972: ...ed COPIER ADJUST DENS SGNL K Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT PTY Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT PTM Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT PTC Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT PTY Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT PTM Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT PTC Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS T SPLY Y Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS T SPLY M Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS T SPLY C Restored COPIER ADJUST DENS T SPLY K R...

Page 973: ... Y Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD OFS M Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD OFS C Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD OFS K Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD OFS Y Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD OFS M Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD OFS C Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD OFS K Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD OFS Y Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD OFS M Restored COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD OFS C Restored COPIER A...

Page 974: ...R 2TR H1 2 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H2 1 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H2 2 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H3 1 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR H3 2 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR C1 1 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR C1 2 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR C2 1 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR C2 2 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR CP 1 Restored COPIER ADJUST HV TR 2TR CP 2 Restored ...

Page 975: ...J LP FEED1 Restored COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ LP FEED2 Restored COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG SPD Restored COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG LEFT Restored COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG MF Restored COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG MFH1 Restored COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG MFH2 Restored COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG N3 Restored COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ LP FEED3 Restored COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REG MENV Restored COPIER ADJUST FE...

Page 976: ...PLY SW UI FAX Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX NEGA GST Restored COPIER OPTION IMG MCON SCR SLCT Restored Restored COPIER OPTION IMG MCON TMC SLCT Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK FTPTXPN Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK NW SPEED Restored COPIER OPTION IMG MCON PRN FLG Restored Restored COPIER OPTION IMG MCON SCN FLG Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW INTROT 1 Res...

Page 977: ...tored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEV POT Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK WUEV RTR Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW SJB UNW Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW IMGC ADJ Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI RSCAN Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI WEB Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI HOLD Restore...

Page 978: ...DEV DMX OF C Restored COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DMX OF K Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK IKEINTVL Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK IPSDEBLV Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW W RAID Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW PSWD SW Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW SM PSWD Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM FAN ROT Restored Restored COPIER OPTION IMG...

Page 979: ...d COPIER OPTION FNC SW SDLMTWRN Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW PRE CURL Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW AUTO OUT Restored COPIER OPTION IMG FIX PRE FXRL Restored COPIER OPTION IMG LSR PRI CLN Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW JLK PWSC Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK IPMTU Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK DDNSINTV Restored Restored Restored COPIE...

Page 980: ...TION IMG DEV DEVL THC Restored COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DEVL THK Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW TNR RS Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW TNNEWQCK Restored COPIER OPTION IMG DEV TNNEWCNT Restored COPIER OPTION IMG DEV TNENDCNT Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW R DR FAN Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW PWR FAN Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW DLVY FAN Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW CRG FANR Restored COPIER OPTION FNC ...

Page 981: ... Restored COPIER OPTION NETWORK BLEPOWER Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW D DLV Y Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW D DLV M Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW D DLV C Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW FIX DLV Restored COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW FIX WRN1 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION FNC SW JLG FLT Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER COPY LIM Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER SLEEP Restored Restored Res...

Page 982: ...ER 2C CT SW Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER LDAP SW Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER FROM OF Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER DOM ADD Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER FILE OF Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER MAIL OF Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER IFAX OF Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER LDAP DEF Restored ...

Page 983: ... OPTION USER VC AVE Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER VC HIGH Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER VC LOW Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER DRS ADR Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER DRS USER Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION USER DRS PSWD Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CST CST1 P1 Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CST CST1 P2 Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CST CST...

Page 984: ...ON CUSTOM2 SP B07 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B08 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B09 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B10 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B11 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B12 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B13 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTO...

Page 985: ...stored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B58 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B59 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B60 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B61 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B62 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B63 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP B64 Restored R...

Page 986: ...stored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V31 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V32 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V33 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V34 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V35 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V36 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V37 Restored R...

Page 987: ...IER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V68 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V69 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V70 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V71 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V72 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V73 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTION CUSTOM2 SP V74 Restored Restored Restored COPIER OPTI...

Reviews:

No comments